JP2012000164A - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enable diversification of a performance mode and improvement of interest to a game, for configuring to change the performance when a ready-to-win performance is to be carried out.SOLUTION: When variable display is to be executed according to a variation pattern for designating a pseudo sequence, a performance display device 9 can be divided into a plurality of areas A to C capable of displaying predetermined performance contents, and executes a performance different in each of the plurality of areas A to C. Further, a performance to be executed at least in any area of the plurality of areas A to C can be changed, and a super ready-to-win performance different in response to a variable mode of performance in an area where the performance has been changed among the plurality of areas A to C is executed. Then, if the performance is changed in two or more areas among the plurality of areas A to C, one super ready-to-win performance is executed in response to a combination of respective variable modes of areas where the performances have been changed.

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display unit that starts variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, and derives and displays a display result. The display result derived and displayed in the variable display unit is specified in advance. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that enters a specific gaming state when a display result is obtained.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a specific display result. Are configured to give the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time and stop, swing, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Some such gaming machines are configured to change the background screen displayed on the variable display unit when performing a reach effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, three types of background screens A to C can be displayed, and the background screen is scrolled and displayed before the reach is reached during symbol variation. In this case, the backgrounds A to C are selected in correspondence with the reach 1 to 3 having different jackpot reliability. With such a configuration, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, for example, if the reach C is displayed when the background C corresponding to the reach 3 (super reach) with high hit reliability is displayed, it is easy to hit a big hit. The expectation at the time of the appearance of the background C is further enhanced.

JP-A-11-319236 (paragraphs 0037-0038, FIG. 10)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, by changing the effect on the variable display unit when the reach effect is performed, attention can be paid to the change in the effect, and the interest in the game can be improved to some extent. However, the reach effect is merely executed in response to the change in the background, and the monotonous effect can only be executed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player feels bored with the performance and cannot fully improve the interest in the game.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying the effect mode and improving the interest of the game when the effect is changed when the reach effect is performed.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention starts variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a first special symbol and a second special symbol) that can identify each, and displays a display result of a variable display unit (for example, a first display). 1 special symbol display device 8a, second special symbol display device 8b), and a specific game when the display result derived and displayed in the variable display section becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) In a gaming machine that is in a state (for example, a big hit gaming state), a temporary stop display result (for example, a chance target symbol) that becomes a non-specific display result once the display result is derived and displayed after variable display of identification information is started ) Is temporarily stopped and displayed, a re-variable display executing means (for example, an effect control system) that executes re-variable display (for example, re-variation) that executes variable display again for all the identification information once or a plurality of times. (The part which performs the change display of the production | presentation symbol with a pseudo | simulation series by performing step S8020-S8023, S8101-S8116, S8120, S872 according to the fluctuation pattern of the super PA3-1 to the super PA3-19 in the microcomputer 100) And a predetermined effect content (for example, an effect in which the female character A201 executed in the area A301 as shown in FIGS. 62 (1) and 63 (1) is flying in the sky, or is executed in the area B302. A plurality of display areas (for example, FIG. 62 and FIG. 63) capable of displaying the effect of the female character B202 walking on the ground and the effect of the female character C203 performing shopping in the region C303. In the areas A301 to C303) shown in FIG. By executing steps S8020 to S8023, S8101 to S8116, S8120, and S872 in accordance with the variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-19 in the production control microcomputer 100, the region execution unit A A part that executes a predetermined effect in each of the areas A to C) and a reach effect execution means that executes a reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) as an effect as to whether or not a specific display result is obtained. (For example, the part that executes step S8105 in accordance with the process data switched in step S8114 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the production execution means is at least one of a plurality of display areas in association with the re-variable display. In one display area (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the process table selected in step S8020 in accordance with any variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-19. By executing steps S8022 and S8105, the effect of any of the areas A to C is changed in the initial variation or re-variation in the pseudo-continuation), and the reach effect executing means displays the effect of changing the effect among the plurality of display regions Different reach effects are executed in accordance with the change in the effect in the region (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes step S8105 using the process data switched in step S8114, thereby changing the effect to the region where the effect has changed. The displayed female character is an enemy character. If the effect changes in two or more display areas among the plurality of display areas, the combination of the change modes of the display areas where the effects have changed. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S8105 by using the process data switched in step S8114, so that the region as shown in FIG. 62 (2) is obtained. When the effects of A301 and area B302 change, as shown in FIGS. 62 (3) to (6), female character A201 and female character B202 displayed in area A301 and area B302 battle with enemy character 204. An effect in such a manner is executed. Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 63 (2) and 63 (3), when the effects of all of the areas A301 to C303 change, as shown in FIGS. 63 (4) to (9), all of the areas A301 to C303. The female character A201, the female character B202, and the female character C203 displayed on the screen perform an effect such that a battle with the enemy character 204 is performed. ). With such a configuration, different reach effects are executed depending on which display area of the plurality of display areas has changed, so the effect when the effect is configured to change when performing the reach effect Aspects can be diversified. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in performance may occur in any of the display areas, and to improve the interest in the game.

  The effect execution means changes the effect to be executed in any one of the plurality of display areas for each re-variable display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 has an effect control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 61). , In accordance with the order indicated by any one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-19, the production of any of the areas A to C is changed for each initial fluctuation and re-variation in the pseudo-series. May be. According to such a configuration, since the effect changes by one display area for each variable display, the effect of the re-variable display can be easily understood by the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. it can.

  The gaming machine includes a pre-determining unit (for example, a part that executes step S61 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) that determines whether or not to enter the specific gaming state before the derivation display of the display result. The effects to be executed in the plurality of display areas are changed in different orders depending on whether the pre-determining means determines the specific gaming state or the pre-determining means determines not to enter the specific gaming state (for example, a game As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the control microcomputer 560 has a case where the combination of the regions where the effects change is the same region A and region B, but is out of play when it is a big hit. The variation pattern of Super PA 3-13 in which the effect changes in the order of region A and region B is compared with region B and region B. The production control microcomputer 100 selects a pseudo sequence according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560. It may be configured such that the accompanying variable display is executed. According to such a configuration, even when the effects in the combination of the same display areas change, the degree of expectation (reliability for entering a specific gaming state depending on the order of the change, such as from which display area the effects have changed) The degree of interest in games can be improved.

  The effect executing means, when changing the effect to be executed in any one display area among the plurality of display areas, changes the effect to be executed in the display area in any one of a plurality of types of change modes. (For example, even if the production control microcomputer 100 changes the production in the same region, as shown in FIG. 62 (2), a female character is trained by being hit by a waterfall in preparation for a battle. (In some cases, it is changed to an effect, and there is a case where the effect is changed to an effect in which a weapon is picked up in preparation for a battle as shown in FIGS. 63 (2) and 63). Different reach effects are executed depending on the change mode when the effect to be executed in the display area is changed (for example, the control microcomputer 100 is different in the change mode). Thus, FIG. 62 (3) - (6) and 63 (4) as shown in - (9), may be configured different manner to perform the effect of super reach of) as. According to such a configuration, even when the presentation in the same display area changes, the reach presentation varies depending on the change mode, so that the reach presentation can be diversified and the interest for the game is improved. be able to.

  The effect execution means changes the plurality of display areas to one display area when the reach effect is executed by the reach effect execution means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the process data switched in step S8114). As shown in FIG. 62 (3) and FIG. 63 (4), the region A301 to the region C303 are combined to form one effect region, and the combined effect region is used by executing step S8105. It may be configured to start production of super reach). According to such a configuration, after the reach production is started, it is possible to prevent a situation where it becomes difficult to understand which production the player should pay attention to, and to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating. can do.

  The variable display unit starts a variable display of a plurality of types of first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) that can identify each, and a first variable display unit (for example, a first variable display unit that derives and displays a display result) A special symbol display unit 8a) and a second variable display unit (for example, a derivative display unit) that starts variable display of a plurality of types of second identification information (for example, second special symbols) that can be identified, and derives and displays a display result , The second special symbol display device 8b), and the effect execution means determines the ratio of the effect to be executed in which display region among the plurality of display regions in the first variable display unit. At least one of the plurality of display areas, depending on whether the variable display of one identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit is executed. The performance to be executed in one display area is changed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11 (A) and 11 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the ratio of development to super reach after the production of the region A changes is high, In the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the ratio of development to super reach after the effect of the region C is changed) may be configured. According to such a configuration, the proportion of which display area of the plurality of display areas changes depends on which variable display of the plurality of identification information is executed. Can improve interest in

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the determination result designation command at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the determination result memory buffer at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous notice effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous notice effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for continuous notice determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous notice allocation table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the table for effect change pattern determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the table for effect change pattern determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the table for effect change pattern determination. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the handling when the change display of a 2nd special symbol interrupts when performing the continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to a 1st start winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect in case a pseudo | simulation ream and super reach are performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the more specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined production performed by each area | region AC on the display screen of an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the more specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined production performed by each area | region AC on the display screen of an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed in each area | region AC on the display screen of the effect display apparatus in case the continuous notice effect of the effect aspect of "effect change" is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed in each area | region AC on the display screen of the effect display apparatus in case the continuous notice effect of the effect aspect of "effect change" is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed in each area | region AC on the display screen of the effect display apparatus in case the continuous notice effect of the effect aspect of "effect change" is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed in each area | region AC on the display screen of the effect display apparatus in case the continuous notice effect of the effect aspect of "effect change" is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the execution timing of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed by each area | region AC on the display screen of an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the execution timing of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed by each area | region AC on the display screen of an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed by each area | region AC on the display screen of an effect display apparatus in case a pseudo | simulation ream and super reach are performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed by each area | region AC on the display screen of an effect display apparatus in case a pseudo | simulation ream and super reach are performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed by each area | region AC on the display screen of an effect display apparatus in case a pseudo | simulation ream and super reach are performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of the predetermined | prescribed effect performed by each area | region AC on the display screen of an effect display apparatus in case a pseudo | simulation ream and super reach are performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the general execution timing of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect timing in the case of interrupting a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect timing in the case of interrupting a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the continuous notice lottery prohibition period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the allocation state of the determination value in the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for deviation.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower plate main body and the like below the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. In this embodiment, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays “left”, “middle”, “ It may be divided into three production areas “right”. In this embodiment, the “middle” effect region is referred to as region A, the “left” effect region is referred to as region B, and the “right” effect region is referred to as region C. In the effect display device 9, an effect having a predetermined story property is executed in each of the areas A to C, and an effect executed in each of the areas A to C is executed according to a common time axis. For example, in this embodiment, in the region A, an effect in which the female character A is usually flying in the sky is executed, and in the region B, an effect in which the female character B is normally walking on the ground is performed. In the area C, the effect that the female character C is usually shopping is executed.

  Note that “execution of performance according to a common time axis” means that the contents that are always associated with each other at the arbitrary timing are displayed in each of the areas A to C, and thus are common in time. It means doing. For example, when an effect is executed in a manner reminiscent of the morning time zone in the region A, the effect is executed in a manner reminiscent of the morning time zone in the region B and the region C. When the effect is executed in a manner reminiscent of the time zone, the effect is also executed in the region B and the region C in a manner reminiscent of the night time zone. In addition, if it is made to display simultaneously in the same place, since it will become easy to understand that the production in each area | region AC is common in time, the character etc. which appear in each area | region AC are shown in the same place. It is desirable to produce effects that are displayed simultaneously. Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (3) and FIG. 63 (4), which will be described later, after the pseudo-ream or continuous notice effect is executed, the effect changes after becoming super reach. By performing an effect such that each female character displayed in the area is displayed at the same place at the same time, it is easy to understand that the effects are common in time.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the pseudo-ream or the continuous notice effect is executed, the effects of the areas A to C may change during the display of the effect symbols. For example, in this embodiment, the female characters A to C displayed in the areas A to C are switched from the normal mode to the mode of performing training in preparation for the battle, or the female characters A to C are in battle. In preparation, it is switched to an effect that takes a weapon. And, when the production changes in any one or more of the areas A to C during the variation display of the production symbols, the areas A to C are combined into one production area, and the combined one Super reach production is executed in the production area. In this embodiment, as an effect of the super reach, an effect of performing a battle between the female character and the enemy character displayed in the region where the effect has changed among the regions A to C is executed.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area for variably displaying three ornamental (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is displayed. is there. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  However, in this embodiment, after the variable display is started, it is divided into the areas A to C during the pseudo-continuous or continuous notice effect, and a predetermined effect is executed in each of the areas A to C, When the effect of super reach is being executed, for example, three decorations (for production) “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed on the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The effect symbol display area including a total of three symbol display areas for variably displaying the effect symbols is reduced and displayed.

  In addition, each of the left, middle, and right is displayed in the symbol display area that is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 or enlarged on the entire display screen of the effect display device 9. Although there is a symbol display area, the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, or the three regions of the symbol display area may be separated. Similarly, in this embodiment, three effect areas (areas A to C) are provided on the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9, but the positions of the areas A to C are displayed on the effect display apparatus 9. The screen may not be fixed, and the three effect areas A to C may be separated.

  The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, as a specific aspect of the reach effect, as described later, after the effect in the plurality of areas A to C is changed, the lower right of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is used. In a state where the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end portion of the character, the super-reach effect is performed in such a manner that the female character displayed in the region where the effect has changed battles with the enemy character. In addition, the aspect of reach production is not restricted to what was shown in this embodiment, For example, what is necessary is just to perform the production linked | related with the area | region where the production changed among some area | region AC. For example, the character displayed in each of the areas A to C as an effect change mode performs an effect in which some item (for example, a treasure box) is taken out, and an event using the item taken out by the character occurs. You may perform the super reach effect of a mode (for example, a mode that something jumps out of a treasure box). Further, for example, after changing the effects of the areas A to C in a manner having a series of narrative characteristics, it may be developed into a super reach effect. For example, a dog, a monkey, or a pheasant appears in each of the areas A to C, and a super reach effect is performed in such a manner that the dog, monkey, or pheasant that appears in the region where the production has changed is directed toward demon elimination according to Momotaro As long as there is some relationship with the production changes in the areas A to C, the super reach production mode is not limited to that shown in this embodiment.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit, and the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit). If control is possible, the display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the jackpot game, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In this case, a display color reminiscent of a big hit in the 4th symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (a display color different from a loss is displayed. The display color may be different depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is a promising jackpot or a regular jackpot), and a jackpot that can be expected to win a game ball at the jackpot ( For example, the display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hits with different numbers of rounds, the round that is continued in the big hit game The display colors when the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off may be assimilated with the background image when the lights are turned off to prevent them from becoming invisible. Scene image different display color (e.g., black) it is desirable that.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement in the vicinity of the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation is a big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9). It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition is easily established. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (probability big hit, normal big hit, sudden probability big hit, small hit, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 14). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is a state in which the effect symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 9 are in the reach state (in this example, only the left and right symbols are stopped at the same symbol and the middle symbol is continuously changed). State) or an effect using a predetermined character (for example, an effect in which an ally and an enemy character perform a battle). In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33).

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. In the effect symbol display area, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas. Finally, the effect symbol display area that is reduced and displayed at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is enlarged to the entire display screen of the effect display device 9, and “ There are cases where production symbols are stopped and displayed together in the symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right.” In the case of sudden probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit symbol will not be reached. (Eg “135”) stopped There is also a case to be shown).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  6 and 7 are explanatory diagrams showing the variation patterns of the effect symbols prepared in advance. Among these, FIG. 6 shows the variation pattern of the effect symbol when the variable display result is “out of place”, and FIG. 7 shows the effect symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern is shown. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-9 and Super PB3-1 are prepared. Among these, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2 are fluctuation patterns with only normal reach, and normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are fluctuation patterns with pseudo-ream and normal reach. Further, Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-9 are fluctuation patterns with a pseudo reach along with super reach, and Super PB3-1 is a fluctuation pattern with only super reach.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 6, about the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 which is used when not reaching and which has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-continuity, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-3, re-variation is performed once, and super PA3-4 to super PA3-9 are performed. When using, re-variation is performed twice. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  In this embodiment, when the pseudo-ream is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into a plurality of effect regions (region A to region C), and the effect is displayed according to the re-change. An effect changes in each area | region AC of the display screen of the display apparatus 9. FIG. Specifically, when using the variation pattern of the super PA 3-1, first, after the variation of the area A on the display screen of the representation display device 9 is changed in the first variation, it develops to super reach after the variation again, and the final stop pattern As a result, a symbol is derived and displayed. When the variation pattern of Super PA 3-2 is used, first, after the variation of the region B on the display screen of the representation display device 9 is changed in the first variation, it develops into a super reach after the variation again, and the symbol that is not the final stop symbol Is derived and displayed. When the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 is used, first, after the variation of the region C on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed in the first variation, it develops into a super reach after re-variation, and is deviated as a final stop symbol. Is derived and displayed.

  When the variation pattern of Super PA 3-4 is used, first, the effect of area A changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first change, and then the effect of area B changes in the first re-variation. The super-reach is developed by the second re-variation, and a symbol out of the final stop is derived and displayed. When using the variation pattern of Super PA 3-5, first, the effect of region B changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first change, and then the effect of region A changes in the first re-variation. The super-reach is developed by the second re-variation, and a symbol out of the final stop is derived and displayed. When the variation pattern of Super PA 3-6 is used, first, the effect of region B changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first variation, and then the effect of region C changes in the first re-variation. The super-reach is developed by the second re-variation, and a symbol out of the final stop is derived and displayed. When the variation pattern of Super PA 3-7 is used, first, the effect of region C changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first variation, and then the effect of region B changes in the first re-variation. The super-reach is developed by the second re-variation, and a symbol out of the final stop is derived and displayed. When using the variation pattern of Super PA 3-8, first, the effect of region C changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first change, and then the effect of region A changes in the first re-variation. The super-reach is developed by the second re-variation, and a symbol out of the final stop is derived and displayed. Further, when using the variation pattern of Super PA 3-9, first, the effect of region A changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first variation, and then the effect of region C changes in the first re-variation. The super-reach is developed by the second re-variation, and a symbol out of the final stop is derived and displayed.

  In this embodiment, even if the combination of the regions where the effects change is the same, the order in which the effects change may be different. For example, the combination of areas where the production changes in both Super PA 3-4 and Super PA 3-5 is the same in Area A and Area B, but when Super PA 3-4 is used, the production in Area A is first changed. Then, in the case where Super PA 3-5 is used, the effect in area B is changed after the effect in area B is changed.

  In this embodiment, when the pseudo-run is executed, a case is shown in which the effect of the first region (in this example, region A) is changed in the initial variation. It is possible not to change, and to change the effect of the first area in the first re-variation, and thereafter change the effect for each re-change.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a pseudo-ream is executed, the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream and the number of regions where the effect changes are the same, and the effect of one region changes for each re-change. However, the number of times of re-variation and the number of regions where the production changes are not necessarily the same. For example, the number of regions in which the production changes is smaller than the number of re-variations, and the production is not changed for any re-variation in the pseudo-series (that is, thinning-out of re-variation in which production changes are performed). By using the changed pattern, the pseudo-ream can be executed during the change display of the effect symbol. On the other hand, the number of areas in which the production changes is larger than the number of re-variations, and the production is performed using a variation pattern configured so that the production changes in two areas in any of the re-variations in the pseudo-continuation. You may comprise so that a pseudo | simulation series can be performed during the fluctuation display of a symbol.

  As described above, when thinning out the re-variation in which the production change is performed, for example, the expectation level (reliability level) for the big hit depends on which re-variation of the plurality of re-changes is not to change the production. ) May be different. Further, as described above, when changing the effects of a plurality of areas in one re-change, for example, the degree of expectation for the big hit depending on which re-change of the plurality of areas is changed (Reliability) may be varied.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the pseudo-run is executed, the effects in the areas A to C change according to the re-variation, but the continuous notice effect described later is executed. Even in the case, the effects in the areas A to C may change in the same manner. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the change display to be notified is a super reach jackpot (when the change pattern of super PA3-10 to super PA3-19 and super PB3-2 described later is used). , When the super reach is shifted (when the variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-9 or super PB3-1 is used), or when the non-reach is shifted (the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-2 is used) In some cases, a continuous notice effect may be executed. In this case, when the variation pattern of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-19 is specified in the variation display of the advance notice target, in addition to the continuous advance notice production, the production of the multi-regions A to C is also changed in the pseudo-continuation. As a result, the control of the effect change in the plural areas A to C becomes complicated. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode described later is executed, even if the variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-19 is designated. Instead of selecting the process table according to the variation pattern and executing the variation display of the production symbol, the process table for the variation subject to the advance notice is selected to execute the variation display of the production symbol. By doing so (see step S8017 described later), the change in the effects of the plurality of areas A to C is not performed redundantly (in this case, the pseudo-ream is not executed in the change display, and the change up to the previous change is not performed). Only the super reach production corresponding to the area where the production has changed will be executed). When the variation pattern of the super PB3-1 and the super PB3-2 including only the super reach is not included in order to prevent the control of the production change in the plurality of areas A to C from becoming complicated. It is also possible to configure so that a continuous notice effect can be executed.

  In this embodiment, the super PB 3-1 and the super PB 3-2 described later (a change pattern of only super reach without pseudo-ream) are specified in the change display of the notice target. There may be a case where a continuous notice effect of the “change” effect mode is executed. Also in this case, an effect in which the effect of each area A to C is changed until the notice display of the subject of change is displayed. By selecting the process table for the change subject to notice and executing the change display of the effect symbol (see step S8017 described later), the effect of super reach corresponding to the area where the effect has changed until the previous change is executed. The However, when the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is not executed, the variation pattern of the super PB 3-1 and the super PB 3-2 may be selected. In such a case, since the display screen of the effect display device 9 is not divided in the state of one effect area, an effect different from the case where the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is executed. What is necessary is just to perform the production | generation of the normal super reach of the aspect (For example, the production in which the character different from the female character displayed on area | region AC) appears.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-10 to Super PA3-19, Super PB3-2, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 variation patterns are prepared . Among these, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4 are fluctuation patterns with only normal reach, and normal PB2-3 to normal PB2-4 are fluctuation patterns with pseudo-ream together with normal reach. Moreover, super PA3-10 to super PA3-19 are fluctuation patterns with pseudo-ream together with super reach, and super PB3-2 is a fluctuation pattern with only super reach. In FIG. 7, the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are variation patterns used when suddenly sudden change is a big hit or a small hit.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, when normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Further, when using Super PA 3-10 to Super PA 3-12, the re-variation is performed once. When using Super PA 3-13 to Super PA 3-18, the re-variation is performed twice. When using, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern of Super PA 3-10 is used, first, after the variation of the area A on the display screen of the representation display device 9 is changed in the first variation, it develops to super reach after the re-variation, and finally stops. A jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a symbol. When the variation pattern of Super PA 3-11 is used, first, after the variation of the region B on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed in the first variation, it develops into a super reach after the variation again, and the jackpot symbol as the final stop symbol Is derived and displayed. Further, when using the variation pattern of Super PA 3-12, first, after the variation of the region C on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed in the first variation, it develops into a super reach after the variation again, and the jackpot symbol as the final stop symbol Is derived and displayed.

  When the variation pattern of Super PA 3-13 is used, first, the effect of region A changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first variation, and then the effect of region B changes in the first re-variation. With the second re-variation, Super Reach is developed, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol. When the variation pattern of Super PA 3-14 is used, first, the effect of region B is changed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first change, and then the effect of region A is changed by the first re-variation. With the second re-variation, Super Reach is developed, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol. When the variation pattern of Super PA 3-15 is used, first, the effect of region B changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first variation, and then the effect of region C changes in the first re-variation. With the second re-variation, Super Reach is developed, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol. When using the variation pattern of Super PA 3-16, first, the effect of region C changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first change, and then the effect of region B changes in the first re-variation. With the second re-variation, Super Reach is developed, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol. When the variation pattern of Super PA 3-17 is used, first, the effect of region C changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first variation, and then the effect of region A changes in the first re-variation. With the second re-variation, Super Reach is developed, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol. When the variation pattern of Super PA 3-18 is used, first, the effect of region A changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first change, and then the effect of region C changes in the first re-variation. With the second re-variation, Super Reach is developed, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol.

  Furthermore, when using the variation pattern of Super PA 3-19, first, the effect of region A changes on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the first variation, then the effect of region B changes in the first re-variation, and then The effect of the region C is changed by the second re-variation, and further developed to super reach by the third re-variation, and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the final stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the effects change in all the effect areas of areas A to C during the quasi-continuation, the effects always change in the order of area A, area B, and area C. . Note that even when the effects change in all the effect areas, the order in which the effects change may be different. In this case, for example, a variation pattern in which the effect changes in various orders, such as a variation pattern in which the effect changes in the order of region C, region B, and region A, or a change pattern in which the effect changes in the order of region B, region A, and region C. Patterns may be prepared in advance, and the order in which the effects change may be different even when the effects change in all the effect areas.

  In this embodiment, since the variation pattern (super PA 3-19) in which the effects change in all the effect areas of the areas A to C is provided only in the case of a big hit, all of the areas A to C are included. When the production changes in the production area and becomes super reach, the player can recognize that the big hit has been confirmed. Therefore, the player can be confident that if the effects change in all the effect areas of the areas A to C, it will be a big hit. Note that even in the case of detachment, a variation pattern in which effects change in all the effect areas of the areas A to C may be selected at a low rate during pseudo-continuation. In addition, even in the case where all the effects in the areas A to C may be changed even in the case of the deviation, the effects change in the order of the area C, the area B, and the area A. For example, when the effects change in the order of region B, region A, and region C, the order in which the effects change may be different. And when all the production | presentation of area | region AC changes, you may comprise so that the expectation degree (reliability) with respect to jackpot may differ according to which order the production | generation changed.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 side shows a case in which a variation pattern that can specify the reach type and the region in which the effect is changed is determined. It is possible not to determine the region for changing the type or the effect, but to determine it on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 simply determines a variation pattern that can specify only the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream and the presence / absence of reach, and provides a variation pattern command for designating the determined variation pattern. 100 is transmitted. Then, when the production control microcomputer 100 specifies that there is a pseudo-continuous and a reach based on the variation pattern command, for example, a lottery process using a random number is performed, and the reach type is set to either normal reach or super reach. Decide what to do. Next, if the production control microcomputer 100 decides to use super reach, for example, it performs a lottery process using random numbers, and decides which of the areas A to C is to be used to change the production area. You just have to do it.

  Further, for example, the type of reach may be determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side, and the area for changing the effect may be uniquely determined on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a variation pattern that can specify whether the reach type is normal reach or super reach, and uses a variation pattern command for designating the determined variation pattern for effect control. It transmits to the microcomputer 100. Then, when the production control microcomputer 100 specifies pseudo-continuity and super reach based on the variation pattern command, for example, a lottery using a random number is performed, and regions where the production is changed are represented by regions A to C. It is only necessary to determine which one of these.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which, if the effect changes in at least one effect region among the regions A to C, it always develops to super reach, but the effect changes in any of the regions A to C. However, the final stop symbol may be derived and displayed as it is without developing to super reach and executing normal reach, or performing no reach effect at all. In this case, for example, the variation patterns of the non-reach PA1-4 and the normal PB2-1 to the normal PB2-4 are also configured so as to be accompanied by a change in performance, and the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern. Thus, even if the presentation changes in any of the areas A to C on the game control microcomputer 560 side, the normal reach is executed, or the final stop symbol is derived and displayed as it is without performing the reach presentation at all. Should be determined. In addition, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine that there is no reach based on the variation pattern command, or a lottery using a random number. Even if it is determined that the normal reach is determined by the process, a lottery process using a random number may be further performed to determine which of the areas A to C is to change the effect.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and then by using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, grouping multiple variation patterns by reach type, variation pattern type including variation pattern without reach, variation pattern type including variation pattern with normal reach, and variation pattern including variation pattern with super reach It may be divided into types. Further, for example, when a pseudo-run is configured to be executable, a plurality of change patterns are grouped by the number of re-changes of the pseudo-run, a change pattern type including a change pattern not accompanied by a pseudo-run, and a re-change 1 It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of the first time, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of the second variation, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of the third variation. In addition, for example, in a case where a specific effect such as a slip effect can be executed in addition to the pseudo ream, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slide effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal big hit and a probabilistic big hit, normal CA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, normal reach, and pseudo-continuous A normal CA3-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a super CA3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that develops into a super reach after at least the effect of the region A is changed with a pseudo-continuation, Super CA3-4, which is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that develops into super reach after at least the production of the region B with pseudo-continuations, and super reach after at least the production of the region C with pseudo-continuations change Super CA which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern -5, super CA3-6 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that develops into super reach after all the effects in the areas A to C change with pseudo-continuations, and variation including a variation pattern involving only super reach The pattern type is classified into normal CA3-7. In addition, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, it is classified into a special CA4-1 that is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and a special CA4-2 that is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of a small hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern.

  Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation. -6 and super at least after the production of area A has changed Super CA2-7 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that develops into a super pattern, and Super CA2-8 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that develops into super reach after at least the effect of the region B changes with pseudo-continuation Super CA2-9, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that develops into super reach after at least the effect of region C changes with pseudo-continuation, and normal CA2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only super reach -10.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating (1) a big hit type determination random number and (4) a normal symbol determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number may be used instead of a hardware random number as the jackpot determining random number.

  FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 9 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 9A is a jackpot determination value.

  9B and 9C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 9B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 9B and 9C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that “probability” shown in FIG. 9A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the “probability” shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C indicates the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  9D and 9E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 9D determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 9E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, 10 determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). 3 is assigned to the jackpot type determination table 131b for “sudden probability change big hit” (a ratio of 3/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of gaming value is given, there are two rounds of sudden probable big hits and more than the gaming value. The case where 15 rounds of big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit) is determined as the second specific gaming state to which the amount of gaming value is given will be explained. However, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, Although the case where it is determined to be one specific gaming state is shown, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, the types of jackpots include “normal jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”.

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, it is changed to the probable change state and the short time state is also entered. (See steps S170 and S171 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, the “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big round gaming state of 15 rounds and is not shifted to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state is ended, but is shifted only to the short time state (see step S167 described later). . Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state is maintained until the execution of the variable symbol display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S142 to S145 described later). In this embodiment, the time reduction state also ends when a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the execution of the predetermined number of variable displays is ended (see step S134 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big winning opening is smaller than in “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, after the two-round jackpot gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability changing state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the probability changing state and also to the short time state. Step S170 to be described later). However, in order to make it harder to recognize whether it is a sudden big hit or a small hit, the transition to the right change state (high probability state) is made only when a sudden big odd hit is made during the right change state. It is also possible to shift to the short-time state (high base state), and to shift to the high-probability state only when suddenly probable big hit during the normal state, not to shift to the short-time state (high base state). Good.) After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S134 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained (described later). Steps S147 to S151). By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “suddenly probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 10A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and FIG. 10B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation pattern of the determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 when the normal big hit or the probable big hit. If so, it can be seen that a variable display accompanied by at least super reach is executed.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, when the control is made to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. Can be determined.

  FIG. 10D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 (D), when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 11A to 11D are explanatory diagrams illustrating the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Of these, FIG. 11 (A) shows a variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Is shown. Further, FIG. 11B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss that is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storage is less than 3 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Show. FIG. 11C shows a variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss that is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (the first special symbol variation display). Common to the case of performing the change display of the second special symbol). Further, FIG. 11D shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135D that is used when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the game state is the normal state and the total number of reserved storage is less than 3, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, at least the region The rate at which super CA2-7, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that develops into a super reach when the production of A changes, is selected as a super CA2-8 or super CA2 that is another variation pattern type that becomes a super reach. It is higher than -9. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11B, when the game state is the normal state, the total number of reserved storage is less than 3, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, at least the effect of the region C is achieved. The rate at which super CA2-9, which is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that changes and develops into super reach, is selected is higher than that of other variation pattern types that become super reach, such as super CA 2-7 and super CA 2-8. It is high. That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the ratio of development to super reach after the effect of the region A changes is high, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this case, the ratio of development to super reach after the production of the region C changes is high. Therefore, since the proportion of which effect area changes changes depending on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. it can.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3, the deviation pattern type determination table 135A for the first special symbol and the second special symbol Although the case of providing the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B has been shown, even when the total number of pending storage is 3 or when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short-time state, the failure for the first special symbol A variation pattern type determination table for use and a variation pattern type determination table for detachment for the second special symbol may be provided. Also, for example, with regard to the big hit variation pattern type determination table, a big hit variation pattern type determination table for the first special symbol and a big hit variation pattern type determination table for the second special symbol may be provided. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 11, a case where separate outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> C and 135 </ b> D are used for a case where the gaming state is a probable change state or a short-time state and a case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more is shown. However, a common variation pattern type determination table for losing may be used in the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11D, a case is shown in which one variation variation / temporal deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D is used. However, a variation variation type classification determination table for certain variation / shortening states is used. A plurality of deviation variation pattern determination tables (tables with different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B used when the total pending storage number is less than 3, and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Although the case of using the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C used in a certain case is shown, the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  The “specific variable display pattern” refers to a variation pattern such as a variation pattern with super reach, which is set with a high expectation level for at least a big hit and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. In addition, “expectation degree (reliability) for big hit” means that a big hit is given when variable display by the specific variable display pattern (for example, variable display with super reach) is executed or when a notice effect is executed. It shows the appearance rate (probability). For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3. A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 to super CA2-10 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super CA2-7 to super CA2-10) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C, in this embodiment, when the game state is a normal state and the game state is a normal state, the value of a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo-ream or the slide effect) regardless of the total number of the pending storage. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, as shown in this embodiment. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state. However, is the current gaming state in a probable variation state? Depending on whether the time is short or normal, a big hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern of shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 11C. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is a short-time state or a probable variation state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table. It may be determined.

  12A and 12B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, super CA3-3 to super CA3-7, The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either special CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. There is a normal CA3-2, a super CA3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that develops into a super reach after at least the production of the region A is accompanied by a pseudo-continuation, and at least the production of the region B is accompanied by a pseudo-continuation. Super CA3-4, which is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that develops into super reach after changing, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that develops into super reach after the production of at least the region C changes with pseudo-continuation. Super CA3-5 and all areas A to C with pseudo-ream It is classified into a super CA 3-6 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that develops into super reach after production changes, and a normal CA 3-7 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that involves only super reach. The case is shown.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 includes the super PA 3-10 that develops into a super reach after the effect of only the area A changes with the pseudo-continuation, and the area A and the area B with the pseudo-continuation. Super PA 3-13 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of, and Super PA 3-14 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of the areas B and A with pseudo-continuations, and the area with pseudo-continuations Super PA 3-17, which develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of C and area A, and Super PA 3-18, which develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of area A and area C with pseudo-continuation It is. Also, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), in this embodiment, the effects of two regions (including at least region A) change as compared to super PA 3-10 in which the effect of only region A changes. The ratio of selecting Super PA 3-13, Super PA 3-14, Super PA 3-17, or Super PA 3-18 is high. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12A, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same area A and area B change, the super PA 3-13 whose effects change in the order of area A and area B. The rate of selection is higher than the super PA 3-14 in which the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region A. Also, as shown in FIG. 12A, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same area C and area A change, the super PA 3-17 whose effects change in the order of area C and area A. The rate of selection is higher than the super PA 3-18 in which the effect changes in the order of the region A and the region C.

  In addition, in the variation pattern type of super CA 3-4, the production is performed in the order of super PA 3-11 that develops into super reach after the production of the region B only with the pseudo-continuous, and the region B and the region C with the pseudo-continuous. Super PA 3-15 that develops into super reach after changing, Super PA 3-16 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of regions C and B with pseudo-continuations, and regions A and B with pseudo-continuations The super PA 3-13 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of, and the super PA 3-14 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of the areas B and A with pseudo-continuations are allocated. Also, as shown in FIG. 12A, in this embodiment, the effects of two regions (including at least region B) change compared to super PA 3-11 in which the effect of only region B changes. The ratio of selecting Super PA 3-15, Super PA 3-16, Super PA 3-13, or Super PA 3-14 is high. Also, as shown in FIG. 12A, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same region B and region C change, the super PA 3-15 in which the effects change in the order of the region B and the region C. The rate of selection is higher than the super PA 3-16 in which the effect changes in the order of the region C and the region B. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12A, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same area A and area B change, the super PA 3-13 whose effects change in the order of area A and area B. The rate of selection is higher than the super PA 3-14 in which the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region A.

  In addition, in the variation pattern type of super CA 3-5, the effects are produced in the order of super PA 3-12 that develops into super reach after the effect of only region C changes with pseudo-continuations, and region C and region A with pseudo-continuations. Super PA 3-17 that develops into super reach after changing, Super PA 3-18 that develops into super reach after production changes in the order of region A and region C with pseudo-continuations, Region B and region C with pseudo-continuations The super PA 3-15 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of and the super PA 3-16 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of the areas C and B with pseudo-continuations are allocated. Also, as shown in FIG. 12A, in this embodiment, the effects of the two regions (including at least the region C) change compared to the super PA 3-12 in which the effect of only the region C changes. The ratio of selecting Super PA 3-17, Super PA 3-18, Super PA 3-15, or Super PA 3-16 is high. Also, as shown in FIG. 12A, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same area C and area A change, the super PA 3-17 whose effects change in the order of area C and area A. The rate of selection is higher than the super PA 3-18 in which the effect changes in the order of the region A and the region C. Also, as shown in FIG. 12A, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same region B and region C change, the super PA 3-15 in which the effects change in the order of the region B and the region C. The rate of selection is higher than the super PA 3-16 in which the effect changes in the order of the region C and the region B.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, only in the case of big hit, as shown in FIG. 12A, the variation pattern type of super CA 3-6 is selected, and the effects of all the effect areas in areas A to C change. In some cases, the variation pattern of the super PA 3-19 that develops into super reach is selected.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, compared with the case of being out of place, the ratio that the variation pattern in which the effect changes in more effect regions is selected is higher, and more As the production changes in many production areas, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit increases (especially, if the production changes in all areas A to C, the big hit is determined). .

  The “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when the variation display is executed. For example, the expectation of jackpot when the display of only the region A changes and the variable display that develops into the super reach is executed is (when the jackpot is determined to be the big hit, the effect of only the region A changes and the super reach is achieved. (Proportion of development) / (proportion in which the production only in the region A changes when it is determined to be a big hit and when it is determined to be lost, and develops into super reach).

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit increases as the number of areas where the presentation changes increases. The method of associating with the degree of expectation (reliability) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, you may comprise so that the expectation degree (reliability) with respect to jackpot may differ with the production | generation of which area | region among area | regions A-C changed. In this case, for example, when the effect of region C changes, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the effect of region A changes (for example, when the effect of the same region B changes) Even so, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher when the effects of region B and region C are changed than when the effects of region A and region B are changed), FIG. The determination value may be assigned in the hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 12B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2, a special effect PG 1-2, and a special effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, as the variation pattern type, non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern of non-reach and normal variation, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with non-reach and a specific effect. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach and non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation, normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, Normal CA2-5 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a normal reach and re-variation two-time quasi-continuity, and normal CA 2-6 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a normal reach and one-time quasi-continuation quasi-continuation. And at least after the production of area A changes with pseudo-ream Super CA2-7 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that develops, and Super CA2-8 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that develops into super reach after at least the effect of the region B is changed with pseudo-continuity, Super CA2-9, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that develops into super reach after the production of at least the region C is changed with a pseudo-ream, and Super PB3-, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only super reach. A case where it is classified into 1 and 1 is shown.

  In this embodiment, the super CA2-7 variation pattern type includes super PA3-1 that develops into super reach after the effect of only area A changes with pseudo-continuations, and area A and area B with pseudo-continuations. Super PA3-4 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of, and Super PA 3-5 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of region B and region A with pseudo-continuation, and region with pseudo-continuation Super PA 3-8 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of C and region A, and super PA 3-9 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of region A and region C with pseudo-continuations are allocated. It is. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the PA 3-4 in which the effects of the two regions (including at least the region A) are changed as compared with the super PA 3-1, in which the effect of only the region A is changed. , Super PA 3-5, Super PA 3-8 or Super PA 3-9 is selected at a low rate. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same area A and area B change, the super PA 3-4 whose effects change in the order of the area A and the area B is better. The selected ratio is lower than the super PA 3-5 in which the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region A. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same area C and area A change, the super PA 3-8 whose effects change in the order of the area C and the area A is better. The selected ratio is lower than the super PA 3-9 in which the effect changes in the order of the area A and the area C.

  In addition, in the variation pattern type of Super CA 2-8, the production is performed in the order of Super PA 3-2 that develops into super reach after the production of the region B only with the pseudo-continuation, and the region B and the region C with the pseudo-continuation. Super PA 3-6 that develops into super reach after the change, Super PA 3-7 that develops into super reach after production changes in the order of regions C and B with pseudo-continuations, and regions A and B with pseudo-continuations A super PA 3-4 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of, and a super PA 3-5 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of the areas B and A with pseudo-continuations are allocated. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, compared to super PA 3-2 in which the effect of only region B changes, super PA 3−3 in which the effect of two regions (including at least region B) changes. 6, Super PA3-7, SuperPA3-4 or Superpa3-5 is selected at a low rate. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same region B and region C change, the super PA 3-6 in which the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region C. The selected ratio is lower than the super PA 3-7 in which the effect changes in the order of the region C and the region B. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same area A and area B change, the super PA 3-4 whose effects change in the order of the area A and the area B is better. The selected ratio is lower than the super PA 3-5 in which the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region A.

  In addition, in the variation pattern type of super CA 2-9, effects are produced in the order of Super PA 3-3 that develops into super reach after the effect of only region C changes with pseudo-ream, and region C and region A with pseudo-ream Super PA3-8 that develops into super reach after the change, Super PA 3-9 that develops into super reach after production changes in the order of region A and region C with pseudo-continuations, and Region B and region C with pseudo-continuations A super PA 3-6 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of and a super PA 3-7 that develops into super reach after the production changes in the order of the areas C and B with pseudo-continuations are allocated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, compared to super PA3-3 in which the effect of only region C changes, super PA3- in which the effect of two regions (including at least region C) changes. 8, Super PA3-9, Super PA3-6 or Superpa 3-7 is selected at a low rate. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same area C and area A change, the super PA 3-8 whose effects change in the order of the area C and the area A is better. The selected ratio is lower than the super PA 3-9 in which the effect changes in the order of the area A and the area C. Further, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same region B and region C change, the super PA 3-6 in which the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region C. The selected ratio is lower than the super PA 3-7 in which the effect changes in the order of the region C and the region B.

  FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (winning time determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning time determination result. In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 24), the game control microcomputer 560 determines in which determination value range the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within the starting prize. judge. Then, a value for specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the determination result specifying command at the time of winning, and control to transmit to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize the variation pattern type when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value based on the winning determination result designation command. At the same time, it can be recognized whether or not the display result is a big hit.

  16 to 19 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the winning determination result designation command. As shown in FIGS. 16 to 19, in this embodiment, in which gaming state the winning determination is made at which of the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is made. EXT data depending on whether there is a display result of the special symbol or production symbol, and whether the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls within the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Is set, and a winning determination result designation command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a normal state and is out of place at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13, in step S229 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not the value is 1 to 79. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 1 designation command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the winning determination result 1 designation command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 2 designation command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 3 designation command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 4 designation command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 5 designation command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 6 designation command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 7 designation command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 8 designation command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern types of super CA2-7 to super CA2-10 are in the range of determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Since they are commonly assigned, the production control microcomputer 100 receives at least the variation pattern type from super CA2-7 to super CA2-10 based on the reception of the winning determination result 8 designation command. (Becoming a super reach).

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the probable change state / short time state and out of place at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first changes the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the type determination random number is 1 to 190. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 190 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 receives a winning in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A time determination result 9 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 191-219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA2-4). A winning determination result 10 designation command is transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 to super CA2-10), the CPU 56 adds “0A (H ) "Is set, and a winning determination result 11 designation command is transmitted.

  Even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, the variation pattern types of super CA2-7 to super CA2-10 may be assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern types of super CA 2-7 to super CA 2-10 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when executing the process of step S229 of the effect process at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is off, common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S224 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a normal big hit is made at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, in step S229 of a winning effect process described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.74. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “0B (H)” is set in the EXT data. The determination result 12 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0C (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 13 designation command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3 to super CA3-7), the CPU 56 adds “0D (H ) "Is set, and a winning determination result 14 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a winning big hit is made at the time of starting winning the first starting winning opening 13, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “0E (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 15 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0F (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 16 designation command is transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3 to super CA3-7), the CPU 56 sets “10 (H ) "Is set, and a winning determination result 17 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big hit when the first winning prize opening 13 is won, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1-100. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “11 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 18 designation command is transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 receives a winning when “12 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 19 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small win is made at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 20 designation command in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a normal state and deviates from the start winning prize to the second start winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not the random number value is 1 to 79. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 21 designation command in which “20 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the winning determination result 21 designation command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 22 designation command in which “21 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 23 designation command in which “22 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 24 designation command in which “23 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 25 designation command in which “24 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 26 designation command in which “25 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 27 designation command in which “26 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 28 designation command in which “27 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern types of super CA2-7 to super CA2-10 are in the range of determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Since they are assigned in common, the production control microcomputer 100 has at least the variation pattern types of super CA2-7 to super CA2-10 based on receiving the winning determination result 28 designation command. (Becoming a super reach).

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the probable change state / short time state and out of place at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first changes the variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the type determination random number is 1 to 190. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 190 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 receives a winning in which “28 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A time determination result 29 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “29 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 191-219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA2-4). A winning determination result 30 designation command is transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA 2-7 to super CA 2-10), the CPU 56 adds “2A (H ) "Is set, and a winning determination result 31 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a normal big hit is made at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, in step S229 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.74. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “2B (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 32 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “2C (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 33 designation command is transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3 to super CA3-7), the CPU 56 adds “2D (H ) "Is set, and a winning determination result 34 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds will be a big win at the time of starting winning the second starting winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines that the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1. It is determined whether or not .about.38. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “2E (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 35 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “2F (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A winning determination result 36 designation command is transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3 to super CA3-7), the CPU 56 sets “30 (H ) "Is set, and a winning determination result 37 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly becomes a big hit at the time of starting winning the second starting winning opening 14, in step S229 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1-100. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the special CA4-1), the CPU 56 receives a prize when “31 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A determination result 38 designation command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “32 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-2). A winning determination result 39 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small win is made at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 transmits a winning determination result 40 designation command in which “33 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, at least for non-reach CA 2-1, a common determination value is assigned regardless of the total number of pending storages, and super CA 2-7 to super CA 2 that are sets of variation pattern types that become super reach. The common determination value is assigned to the set of −10 and the set of super CA3-3 to superCA3-7 regardless of the total number of pending storages (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Inconsistency does not occur between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variation display determined at the time of winning when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 to super CA2-10 or super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 will be described later. A continuous notice effect is performed. In addition, only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 to super CA 2-10, and super CA 3-3 to super CA 3-7 are determined as winning prizes shown in FIGS. Result designation command (specifically, determination result 1 at the time of winning, specification 8 at the time of winning determination, determination 14 at the time of winning determination, designation 17 at the time of winning determination, designation 21 at the time of winning determination, designation of the result 28 of winning determination) In this case, it is also possible to transmit a winning determination result 34 designation command and a winning determination result 37 designation command), and not to receive a winning determination result designation command for other winning determination results. In addition, when it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7 to super CA2-10, and super CA3-3 to super CA3-7, it is determined that the variation pattern type cannot be specified. A winning determination result designation command may be transmitted.

  Note that the “continuous notice effect” is a notice effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. However, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect is performed only once in the variable display before the start of the variable display subject to the notice effect. There may be. Also, for example, the notice effect is started from the change display before the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed until the change display immediately before the change display targeted for the notice effect. It may end, or it may perform a notice effect over a variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. Further, it is not always necessary to continuously execute the display over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect may be executed in a variable display of a plurality of times intermittently every other time or every second time.

  In this embodiment, the determination result at the time of winning including the MODE data “95 (H)” common to the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13 and the starting winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is designated. Although the command is transmitted, even if the MODE data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning is different between the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14. Good. For example, at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13, a winning result designation command including MODE data “95 (H)” is transmitted, and at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening 14, MODE data “ 96 (H) "may be transmitted as a winning result designation command. In this case, regardless of whether it is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14, which game state is displayed, a special symbol or an effect symbol is displayed. Winning determination result designation command including common EXT data, depending on which display result is the result and whether the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is determined to be in the range of the determination value at the start winning May be transmitted.

  Note that the command format of the winning determination result designation command is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, depending on whether the winning result is a big hit, whether it is a big hit, whether it is a big hit type determination result, or a variation pattern type determination result. Different commands may be transmitted. In this case, for example, a symbol designating command for designating whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a big hit, and a judgment result of the big hit type is sent, and separately, a variation that designates the judgment result of the variation pattern type You may comprise so that a category command may be transmitted.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The big hit start designation commands include a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start 2 designation command, and a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command corresponding to the type of big hit. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for sudden probability change big hit start designation in the case of sudden probability change big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in case of small hit. Also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that the jackpot game is normally a big jackpot (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). is there. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state (not including the probability variation state). Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which an effect control command indicating that the number of reserved memories is increased or decreased is transmitted for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may make it transmit the production control command which designates itself. In this case, for example, an effect control command for designating which one of the first start prize opening 13 and the second start prize opening 14 has been won is transmitted, and the reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is designated as the first. You may make it transmit a common production | presentation control command by 1 reserved memory number and 2nd reserved memory number.

  Further, for example, separate presentation control commands (holding memory number designation commands) may be transmitted when the first holding memory number is designated and when the second holding memory number is designated. In this case, for example, as a reserved memory number designation command, a value that can specify the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number as MODE data (for example, “C0 (H) when designating the first reserved memory number) ”And“ C1 (H) ”in the case of designating the second reserved memory number), an effect control command in which the value of the reserved memory number is set as EXT data may be transmitted.

  Also, for example, if the same first reserved memory number is specified, an effect control command specifying the addition or subtraction of the first reserved memory number is transmitted by making the MODE data common and different EXT data. You may do it. For example, when the common MODE data “C0 (H)” is used and the subtraction of the first reserved memory number is designated, the command C000 (H) is transmitted, and the addition of the first reserved memory number is designated. The command C001 (H) may be transmitted. Further, when specifying the second reserved memory number, the MODE data is made different, and when specifying the subtraction of the second reserved memory number, the command C100 (H) is transmitted, and the second reserved memory number is determined. When adding is designated, the command C101 (H) may be transmitted.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  20 and 21 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 32), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 22 (A) is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold port number). Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S212A) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S213A). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 23) (step S214A). . In the process of step S214A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 23, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a time-short flag indicating that the gaming state is a time-short state (including a probability change state) is set (step S215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S218A. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S218A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 56 executes a winning presentation process for preliminarily determining the variation display result when the variation based on the detected starting winning is executed at the time of starting winning (step S217A). ). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 and, at the same time, receives the winning determination result designation command based on the determination result of the winning effect processing. Control to transmit to 100 is performed (step S218A).

  Note that if the winning effect process in step S217A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S215A or step S216A, the CPU 56 transmits only the first reserved memory number addition designation command in step S218A. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command is not performed. Note that if the winning effect process in step S217A is not executed, a command indicating that the winning determination has not been performed is transmitted, or a value indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified (for example, “FF (H) ”) may be transmitted as a winning determination result designation command set as EXT data.

  In this embodiment, when the process of step S215A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, when the gaming state is the normal state (even if the probability change state is short state) If not, the winning effect process in step S217A is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S216A is executed, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13, step S217A is performed only when the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is not established. The award winning directing process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S217A only when the game state is a big hit game state, and the game process may be executed at step S217A when the game state is a small hit game state.

  For example, as shown in this embodiment, it is provided with a plurality of special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, and after the big hit game is finished, it shifts to a high base state (probability variation state or short time state), and priority is given to the variation display of the second special symbol. In the case of execution, if the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is configured to be executable, the pre-reading notice is executed based on the fact that the game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13 during the big hit game or the high base state. If this happens, the player will recognize that there is a high possibility that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed after the big hit game or during the high base state will be a big hit. In this embodiment, when the game shifts to the high base state after the big hit game is finished, the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 becomes easy and the change display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. From the above, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed so that the start winning to the second starting prize opening 14 is not interrupted, and the expected jackpot as the variation display result of the first special symbol is retained. It becomes possible to aim at the big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Then, it is easy to be targeted by the technical intervention of the player, and the number of big hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously generated. There is a risk that the prize ball will be deliberately targeted and the gambling will become too high. Therefore, in this embodiment, by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the big hit gaming state or the high base state, the big hit by the player's technical intervention Are generated in succession to prevent deliberately aiming for more than the expected number of prize balls.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, a probability variation flag, which will be described later, is set and a time reduction flag is set. In the case of the time saving state, only the time saving flag is set (see steps S167, S170, S171 in FIG. 31). Therefore, in this embodiment, if it is confirmed whether or not the time reduction flag is set, it can be determined that the state is at least one of the probability changing state or the time reduction state. Therefore, in the process shown in step S215A, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the time-varying state or the time-shortening state is set by determining whether or not the time-shortening flag is set.

  In this embodiment, the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the big prize opening is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after notification that the big hit is started. It is a state until it is informed that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the big winning opening opening pre-process (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process are executed.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process that is executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S212B), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S213B). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 23) (step S214B). . In the process of step S214B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (step S217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 and, at the same time, receives the prize determination result designation command based on the determination result of the prize effect process. Control to transmit to 100 is performed (step S218B).

  Also in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S215A may be performed, and if the time is short, the winning effect process in step S217B may not be executed. Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S217B may not be executed if a big hit game is being played. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). . With such a configuration, when the continuous notice effect is executed for a certain period, it is possible to reliably prevent the continuous notice effect from being interrupted due to a short variation time.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S217A and S217B. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S214A and S214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 9A. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls. By doing so, the variation pattern type is predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and, as described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a big hit or A continuous notice effect is announced to announce that it will be a super reach.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines whether or not a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state is set. Confirmation (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S214A and S214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If there is a probable big hit before, the normal state has changed to the probable state.). For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match.

  In the winning effect process, only the process of comparing the value of the random number for random determination (random R) with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state is executed, and it is not compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state. (Specifically, only the process of step S220 may be executed and the processes of steps S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deviation from occurring between the jackpot determination result at the time of winning determination and the jackpot determination result at the actual start of variation.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S214A and S214B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see step S217A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 22A). Is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. In addition, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning start effect process (see step S217B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 22B), It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in 9 (C).

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in Step S223), the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (Step S224). In this embodiment, in step S224, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state (specifically, whether or not a short time flag is set). It should be noted that a plurality of variation displays are executed after confirming whether or not the state of probability variation or time reduction is confirmed in step S224 at the time of starting winning, until the actual displaying of variation based on the starting winning is actually started. There is a possibility. For this reason, the game state has changed from the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S224 to determine whether or not the state is the probability change state or the short time state until the display of the actual variation based on the start winning is actually started (for example, If there is a probable big hit before the start of fluctuation, the normal state changes to the probable state.). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S224 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for detachment according to the determination result of step S224 (step S225). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the winning determination result designation command shown in FIGS. 16 to 19 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 190 and 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is less than or equal to the threshold value 190 in step S229 to be described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 190 (that is, if it is 1 to 190). Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is started, and the second starting winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “28 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result specifying command (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold value is 219 or less (that is, if it is 191 to 219), “09 (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “29 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 219 (that is, if it is 220 to 251), “0A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if it is a start winning prize at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning prize in the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “2A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79. If the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result specifying command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is started, and the second starting winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “20 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result specifying command (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), “01 (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning winning opening 13 is won. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “21 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), and if the first start winning opening 13 is a start winning prize, then “02 (H)” as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 is won, it is determined that “22 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result specifying command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), and if the first winning prize opening 13 is a start winning prize, "03 (H)" as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 is won, it is determined that “23 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), “04 (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning winning opening 13 is won. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “24 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold is 214 or less (that is, if it is 200 to 214), if it is a start winning prize in the first start winning opening 13, it is “05 (H)” as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “25 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 16 and 18). Further, when the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), “06 (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “26 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 16 and 18). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning prize in the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “27 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 16 and 18).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined as 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79 may be determined. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hit (step S226). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251, and determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251) in step S 229 described later. If the first start winning opening 13 is won, it is determined that “13 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning, and the second starting winning opening 14 is started. For example, it is determined that “33 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 17 and 19). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “13 (H)” or “33 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S214A and S214B. Is determined (step S227). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see step S217A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 22A). Is determined using the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a shown in FIG. 9D to determine whether the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “probable variation jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot”. To do. In addition, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning start effect process (see step S217B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 22B), The big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown in FIG. 9 (E) is used to determine whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, or “sudden probability big hit”.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot classification determined by step S227 (step S228).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined that it is a normal big hit. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S229 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “0B (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is started, and the second starting winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “2B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 17 and 19). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, if it is 75 to 149), “0C (H)” is used as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is given to the first starting winning opening 13. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 is won, it is determined that “2C (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 149 (that is, 150 to 251), “0D (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if it is a start winning prize at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “2D (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the probability variation big hit, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 38, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “0E (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is won, and the second starting winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “2E (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 17 and 19). If the threshold is 79 or less (that is, if it is 39 to 79), “0F (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. If it is determined that the second start winning opening 14 has been won, it is determined that “2F (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result specifying command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 80 to 251), “10 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if it is a start winning prize at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning prize in the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “30 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19).

  Further, for example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 100 when it is suddenly determined that the probability variation big hit. In this case, in step S229 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 100, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the first winning winning opening 13 is won, and the second winning winning opening 14 is determined to start. For example, it is determined that “31 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command (see FIGS. 17 and 19). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning if the start winning prize is received at the first starting winning opening 13. It is determined to be set, and if it is a start winning prize in the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that “32 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the determination result designation command at the time of winning (see FIGS. 17 and 19).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S225, S226, and S228 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S214A and S214B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it falls within the determination value range (step S229).

  In steps S225, S226, and S228, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 10 and 11) is set. In step S229, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the winning determination result designation command (step S230). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines whether the winning determination is made when the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is won, and which variation pattern type is determined in step S229. Depending on the game, any one of “00 (H)” to “13 (H)”, “20 (H)” to “33 (H)” as shown in FIGS. Processing to set the EXT data of the specified command is performed. When EXT data is set in step S230, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the winning determination result designation command in steps S218A and S218 in the first start port switch passing process or the second start port switch passing process is a pointer. And a winning determination result designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control command control process of step S28.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, a winning determination result designation command indicating that a winning determination has been made may be transmitted when a big win or a small win is reached. Then, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute a continuous notice effect, which will be described later, based on the reception of a winning determination result designation command indicating that a winning determination is made when a big win is reached.

  25 and 26 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time reduction state background designation command when the time variation flag indicating that the time reduction state is not set and the time reduction state is set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  In this embodiment, the background designation command is transmitted every time for each variation. For example, it is determined at the start of the variation whether or not the gaming state has changed since the previous variation. Only when the state changes, the background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of transmissions of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. 100 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination that is extracted in step S214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 9) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 9A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 9A in the ROM 54 is set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state or the short-time state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Reset at timing.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 9B and 9C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. When the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 9C. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 9D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9E.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 9D and 9E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S81). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. ) To (C)) is selected (step S82). Then, control goes to a step S92.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S83). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 10D as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S84). Then, control goes to a step S92.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S85). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state (including the time of shifting to the probability change state), and is reset when the time reduction state is ended. Specifically, it is usually decided to be a big hit, a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. It is reset when the display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S85), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S91.

  If the time reduction flag is not set (N in Step S85), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Step S86). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (N in step S86), the CPU 56 checks whether or not data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S87). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer (that is, if the first special symbol is subjected to variable display), the CPU 56 sets the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types. As a table used for the determination, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A (see FIG. 11A) is selected (step S88). On the other hand, if the data indicating “first” is not set in the special symbol pointer (that is, the data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. If there is,) the CPU 56 selects the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B (see FIG. 11B) as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types (step S89). ). Then, control goes to a step S92.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S86), the CPU 56 uses the deviation variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135C (see FIG. 11C) is selected (step S90). Then, control goes to a step S92.

  When the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S85), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135D for deviation as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 11D) is selected (step S91). Then, control goes to a step S92.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more by executing the processing of steps S85 to S91, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 11C is selected. The Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case of the probability variation state), the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D shown in FIG. 11D is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S92 to be described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S94. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 13). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case where the probability variation state is included) or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be performed. . In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the short time state (see FIG. 11D) and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storages (FIG. 11C ))) Is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even if the gaming state is a short-time state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), the shortened The fluctuation display of fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S85, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 11A) or the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B (see FIG. 11B) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and in the process of steps S82, S84, S88, S89, S90 or S91. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S92).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 12) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S92. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 13) is selected (step S93). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S93. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S94). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S95). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S96).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S97). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S98).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S85 to S91 and S92 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 11) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 11). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 to super CA2-10, which include fluctuation pattern types), and any one of the fluctuation pattern types is determined based on the reach determination result. A table may be selected to determine the variation pattern type.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 14) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, when the big hit type is a probable big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Specifically, whether or not it is a probable big hit can be determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “02”. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command when the big hit type is suddenly probable big hit (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is a sudden probability variation big hit can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process is “03”. Then, when neither the probability variation big hit nor the sudden probability variation big hit is obtained (that is, when it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 2 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S122 described later. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S125). When the variation time timer times out (step S126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S133). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag indicating the probability change state and the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state if set (step S134). Control to send a big hit start designation command to the microcomputer 100 is performed (step S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is normally jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is a normal big hit, a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer). .

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S137). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, 2 times in the case of a sudden probable big hit) is set in the big prize opening number counter (step S138). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S139).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S133, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S140). If the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S141). When the time reduction flag is set (that is, when the time change state is not controlled and only the time reduction state is controlled), the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times that the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is- 1 (step S142). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S144), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S145).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S147). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S148). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S149). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S150). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S151).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S147), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S152).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, a big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted when it is a normal big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is sent when it is a probable big hit, and a small hit / abrupt is sudden when it is a sudden probable big hit. Send a probable jackpot end designation command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit (step S166). Note that whether or not the probability change big hit or sudden probability change big hit is, specifically, whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02” to “03”. This can be determined by checking. If neither the probability change big hit nor the sudden probability change big hit is present (that is, if it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a time reduction number counter for counting the number of time reductions (step S168). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  If the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S170). Further, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S171). Then, control goes to a step S173.

  In this embodiment, the time reduction flag set in steps S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether or not to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see step S27), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is a win. If so, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The time reduction flag set in steps S167 and S171 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time. In this embodiment, the time reduction flag is also used to determine whether or not the gaming state is a certain change state or a time reduction state in the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 22 (see step S215A). ).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S173).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 14 and 15) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  35 to 39 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  The effect control CPU 101 sets a continuous notice prohibition flag for prohibiting execution of a process for determining a continuous notice effect, which will be described later, and sets a continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer for measuring the prohibition period for a predetermined time ( For example, 32 ms) is set (step S616A). In other words, in this embodiment, even if the variation pattern command is received and the variation display of the production symbol is started, the determination of the continuous announcement production is prohibited until a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) elapses, and the continuous announcement production is performed. Not started. By controlling in such a manner, the continuous notice effect is not determined from the time when the change pattern command is received until at least the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received. This prevents a situation in which an unnatural production is produced due to a gap between the two.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is received after 4 ms from the reception of the variation pattern command, and the pending storage number subtraction designation command is received after the elapse of 4 ms, but the variation pattern command is received. If a start prize is received within 8 ms from when the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received, and when the reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the continuous notice effect is executed based on the number of the reserved memory number that is increased by one. The number of times may be determined. For example, if the start winning is received after receiving the hold memory number subtraction designation command after starting the variable display in a state where there are two hold memory numbers, the production control CPU 101 receives the hold memory number addition designation command. Based on this, it is recognized that there are three pending storage numbers. If the continuous notice effect is determined in this state, a situation in which it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executed over three variable displays is generated because the number of reserved memories is internally recognized as three. . However, after that, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received and the reserved memory number returns to the state of two, so that the continuous notice effect for three times is actually executed even though only two fluctuation displays are actually executed. As a result, there is a difference between the number of reserved memories and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if a variation pattern command is received, such a disadvantage is prevented by prohibiting the determination of the continuous notice effect until a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) has elapsed. Yes.

  In this embodiment, 32 ms (for example, one frame from the start of the change of the production symbol is provided with a slight allowance between the time when the change pattern command is received and the time when the reserved memory count subtraction designation command is received. In this example, the time required for changing the design of the symbol is set in the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer, but the time required for receiving the reserved memory count subtraction command after receiving the change pattern command (8 ms) ) May be set in the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer.

  In this embodiment, a continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer is set, and the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer is timed out as described later, and the continuous notice prohibition flag is reset to prohibit the determination of the continuous notice effect. Although the state is to be released, the continuous notice prohibition flag is reset based on receipt of the reserved memory count subtraction designation command without using the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer, and the determination of the continuous notice effect is prohibited. You may make it cancel a state.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which control is performed so that execution of the determination of the continuous notice effect is prohibited until a predetermined period elapses after receiving the variation pattern command. However, the variation pattern command is received. Control may be performed to prohibit the execution of the continuous notice effect for the winning determination result indicated in the winning determination result designation command received until the predetermined period elapses.

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 sets a display result designation command reception flag (step S618A). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618B).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S622). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S644). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S652). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S653).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S654), the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S655). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 18d in accordance with the updated second reserved memory number (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S658). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S659).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S660), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S661). Further, the production control CPU 101 updates the display of the second reserved memory number on the second reserved memory display unit 18d according to the updated second reserved memory number (step S662).

  In steps S652, S653, S655, S656, S658, S659, S661, and S662, the reserved memory count and the reserved memory display are not immediately updated on the basis of receiving the command, but the reserved memory count addition designation is first performed. When the command is received, it may be confirmed whether or not the continuous notice prohibition flag is set. If the continuous notice prohibition flag is set, the addition of the reserved memory number and the reserved memory display may not be performed. In this case, when the reserved memory subtraction designation command is received thereafter, the reserved memory number is not subtracted or the reserved memory display is not performed, and the reserved memory number may be matched. By doing so, it is possible to reduce troublesome display in which the number of stored memories is turned on and off for a moment.

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command reception flag (step S663A). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started. Further, the production control CPU 101 clears the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S665). That is, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are 0, and the variable display is not executed. Reset the number of pending storage to be stored. Even if the processing of step S665 is executed and the production control microcomputer 100 is in a state in which the addition or subtraction omission of the reserved memory number occurs and the erroneous reserved memory number is recognized, the reserved memory is stored. Can be reset to return to the normal state.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S667). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a probability change state flag indicating that the game state is a probability change state and a time reduction state flag indicating that the game state is a time reduction state (step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a green display). Color background screen) (step S670). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S673), the effect control CPU 101 displays a background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen (for example, a red display). Color background screen) (step S674). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability variation state flag (step S675).

  Next, if the received effect control command is any prize determination result designation command (step S676), the effect control CPU 101 determines the prize determination result according to the received prize determination result designation command. The result is stored in the result storage buffer (step S677). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a winning determination result designation command reception flag indicating that the winning determination result designation command has been received (step S678).

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of an area for storing a winning determination result (winning determination result storage buffer). As shown in FIG. 40, in this embodiment, a first winning determination result storage buffer for storing a winning determination result at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, and a second starting winning opening 14 are stored. A second winning determination result storage buffer for storing a winning determination result at the time of starting winning is prepared. As shown in FIG. 40, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first winning determination result storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second winning determination result storage buffer. In this embodiment, the EXT data of the received winning determination result designation command is stored in the first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer. The first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer are formed in a RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S679). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the continuous notice prohibition flag is set (step S800A). If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S800E as it is, and a continuous notice effect determining process for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode is executed. If the continuous notice prohibition flag is set, the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer (step S800B). Then, when the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer times out (step S800C), the effect control CPU 101 resets the continuous notice prohibition flag (step S800D), and executes a continuous notice effect determination process (step S800E). On the other hand, if it has not timed out, it controls so that a continuous notice effect determination process is not performed.

  By executing the processing of steps S800A to S800E, the continuous notice prohibition flag is reset when a predetermined period has elapsed since the change pattern command was received, and the prohibition state for determining the continuous notice effect is canceled. Also, the continuous notice effect determination process is executed only when it is not the prohibition period of the continuous notice determination (when the continuous notice prohibition flag is not set). In the production control microcomputer 100, for example, when the production control process is executed with a timer interruption every 33 ms, the variation pattern command is not measured without measuring the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer. If it is within the received interrupt (in this case, it is within 33 ms after receiving the variation pattern command and the pending storage number subtraction designation command has not yet been received), the presentation control process is once exited. The continuous notice effect may be determined in the effect control process executed at the next timer interruption after 33 ms. By doing so, the timer measurement process is not required, and the processing burden on the production control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): When the big hit is reached, after the variation time is over, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. In the case of a small hit, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the small hit after the end of the variation time. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  42 and 43 are flowcharts showing the continuous notice effect determination process (step S800E). In the continuous notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the winning determination result designation command reception flag is set (step S6000). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. If set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the winning determination result designation command reception flag (step S6001), and executes a process for determining the continuous notice effect after step S6002. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the timing when a new start win occurs and the determination result designation command at the time of winning is received, based on the fact that the winning determination result designation command reception flag is set at step S6000, continuous notice is given. The production is decided. However, if the timing at which a new start prize is generated and the determination result designation command at the time of winning is a prohibition period for determining the continuous notice effect, wait until the prohibition period ends (see steps S800A to S800E). In step S6000, based on the fact that the winning determination result designation command reception flag is set, the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether any continuous notice execution flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is already being executed is set (step S6002). Note that the continuous advance notice execution flag is set in step S6023 to be described later. If any of the continuous notice execution flags is set, the processing is ended as it is. That is, when the continuous notice effect is already being executed, control is performed so that the determination process of the continuous notice effect is not repeated.

  In this embodiment, since the process of step S6002 is executed, when the continuous notice effect is already being executed, control is performed so as not to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect. However, even if the continuous notice effect is already being executed, it may be determined whether to execute the continuous notice effect. For example, when executing a continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “holding ball change”, which will be described later, by changing the display color and display shape of a plurality of reserved memories to be noticed, a plurality of notice objects at the same time A continuous notice effect may be executed for the reserved storage.

  If no continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all winning determination results stored in the winning determination result storage buffer (step S6003). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the probability variation state flag or the time reduction state flag is set. Then, if neither the probability variation state flag nor the short time state flag is set (that is, the normal state (low base state)), the effect control CPU 101 stores the winning prize stored in the first winning judgment result storage buffer. All the time determination results are extracted. Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the second winning determination result storage buffer if the probability variation state flag or the short time state flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state or the short time state (high base state)). Extract all winning determination results.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a continuous notice effect on the condition that all the variation displays until the variation display to be determined in step S6005 to be described later is started are all “non-reach”. is doing. With such a configuration, as described later, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the continuous notice effect is impaired due to the reach effect interrupting in the middle of the continuous notice effect. In particular, in this embodiment, there is a case where a continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode, which will be described later, is executed. In such a case, the effect of any of the areas A to C is achieved. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the normal reach interrupts despite the change and the effect performed in the plurality of areas A to C cannot be matched with the reach effect. It should be noted that the latest winnings are not performed without performing the process of step S6005 for determining whether or not all the variation displays until the variation display that is the determination target starts are “out of reach (may be out of reach)”. It may be configured to perform only the processing in step S6004 for determining whether or not the time determination result is a determination result indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the latest winning determination result among the extracted winning determination results is a determination result indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”. Confirmation is made (step S6004). In this case, when neither the probability variation state flag nor the time-short state flag is set and the normal state, the effect control CPU 101 determines the winning time determination extracted from only the first winning time determination result storage buffer in step S6003. It is checked whether or not the latest winning determination result among the results is a determination result indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”. Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the winning determination result extracted only from the second winning determination result storage buffer in step S6003 when the probability changing state flag or the time reduction state flag is set and the probability changing state or the time reduction state is set. It is checked whether or not the latest winning determination result is a determination result indicating “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines that the latest winning determination result is a determination result indicating “not reachable”, “not reached superreach”, or “super reach big hit” (Y in step S6004). ), The process proceeds to step S6005. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the processes of steps S6003 and S6004 are executed, there is a change display that becomes “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit” (in addition, Whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in the processing after step S6006) (when it is determined that all non-reach is out of each variation display until the variation display to be determined in step S6005 is started). May be determined, and a continuous notice effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. It should be noted that if there is a determination result of a big hit, not limited to “super reach big hit”, the process may proceed to step S6006 to determine the continuous notice effect. In addition, when there are a plurality of undecided winning determination results among the extracted winning determination results, not only the latest winning determination result, all of them are determined, and even one of them is “not reachable”, “ If there is a fluctuating display such as “Super-reaching out” or “Super-reaching big hit”, it may be determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the processing after Step S6006.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S6004 that the variation pattern type becomes non-reach CA2-1 for the latest extracted winning determination result (specifically, “00 (H) "or" 20 (H) "(see FIGS. 16 and 18), values indicating super CA2-7 to super CA2-10 (specifically," 07 (H) "or" 27 (H) ". Refer to FIG. 16 and FIG. 18), or values indicating super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 (specifically,“ 0D (H) ”,“ 10 (H) ”,“ 2D (H) "or" 30 (H) "(refer to FIGS. 17 and 19) (that is, loss fluctuation without a specific effect such as reach or pseudo-ream, loss with super reach) Fluctuating, or super Checks whether the jackpot variation with over switch).

  In this embodiment, it is determined that “super reach is lost” when the variation display of the subject of advance notice is a change pattern of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-9 and Super PB 3-1, and the continuous notice effect is executed. Or a case where it is determined that a “super reach big hit” is made and the continuous notice effect is executed when the change pattern of the notice object becomes a change pattern of Super PA 3-10 to Super PA 3-19 and Super PB 3-2. However, in order to prevent the control of the production change in the plurality of areas A to C from becoming complicated, the variation pattern of the super PB3-1 and the super PB3-2 including only the super reach without the pseudo-ream is designated. Only in the case of a continuous announcement effect may be configured (that is, in the case of super reach only, To enable line, so as not to perform the continuous announcement attraction if the pseudo communication is performed). In this case, for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 executes the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 24, the super CA3-3 to the super CA3-7 and the super CA2 to the variation pattern type that becomes the super reach. It is only necessary to set a threshold value so as to be able to distinguish between 7 and Super CA 2-10, determine the winning time, and send a winning determination result designation command. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 has received a winning determination result designation command for designating super CA3-7, which is a variation pattern type including super PB3-2 with only super reach without pseudo-ream. In step S6004, only when a winning determination result designation command is received that designates super CA2-10 that is a variation pattern type including super PB3-1 that includes only super reach without pseudo-ream. It may be determined that the continuous notice effect can be executed. Even in the case of such a configuration, if the game state is a normal state, the super CA2 that is a variation pattern type including the super PB3-1 with only the super reach without the pseudo-ream if the gaming state is the normal state. Since a common determination value (248 to 251) is assigned to -10 (see FIGS. 11A to 11C), in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. If it is determined whether or not there is at least a super CA 2-10, it can be easily determined that there is a discrepancy between the content of the continuous notice effect and the actual display of the subject subject to change. The situation can be prevented.

  Next, when it is determined that the determination result indicates “non-reach out”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”, the presentation control CPU 101 determines the result based on each extracted winning determination result. It is determined whether or not all the variation displays until the variation display of the determination result is started are “non-reach” (step S6005). If it is determined that all the fluctuation displays are “non-reach”, the process proceeds to step S6006. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a variation that does not result in “non-reach”, the process ends as it is, that is, if the reach effect is executed during the execution of the continuous notice effect, There is a possibility that the production effect by the continuous notice effect cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, such continuity is impaired by controlling so that the continuous notice effect may be executed on the condition that reach is not executed in each variable display until the variable display to be determined is started. The situation is prevented.

  The winning judgment result is either “Non-reach out”, “Super reach out”, or “Super reach big hit”, and all the non-reach displays until the start of the variable display that has been judged In the case of “out of”, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability variation state flag is set (step S6006). If the probability change state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table B as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6007). The continuous notice allocation table will be described later (see FIG. 45).

  If the probability variation state flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the time reduction state flag is set (step S6008). If the time-short state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the value of the number-of-times-after-count counter is 92-100 (that is, during the execution of the 92-100th variable display after the shift to the time-short state). (If it is a case where the start winning is awarded and the variable display is executed) (step S6009). In this case, specifically, the effect control CPU 101 should not have a value of the time-shortening counter value of 100 or more in the time-shortening state. What is necessary is just to determine whether it is above. If the value of the number-of-times-after-counter counter is not 92 to 100, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the power failure recovery flag is set (step S6010). In step S6009, when the value of the number of times after time reduction is 92 to 100 or when the power failure recovery flag is set in step S6010, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether there is a continuous notice effect and the effect of the continuous notice effect. The continuous notice allocation table D is selected as a table for determining the mode (step S6011). If the power failure recovery flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table C as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect form of the continuous notice effect (step S6012).

  If the time-short state flag is not set (that is, in the normal state), the production control CPU 101 determines that the value of the time-short time counter is 101 to 108 (that is, the 101st to 108th time after the shift to the time-short state). (If it is a case where the start-up prize is won and the variable display is executed while the variable display is executed) (step S6013). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 may specifically determine whether or not the value of the after-time-count counter is 101 or more. If the value of the number of times after time reduction is not 101 to 108, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice distribution table A as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step) S6014). If the value of the number of times after time reduction is 101 to 108, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table E as a table for determining the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step) S6015).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect using the continuous notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect (step S6016).

  Note that the continuous notice determination process in step S6016 is executed on condition that no continuous notice execution flag is set in step S6002. That is, in this embodiment, the effect notice determination process is executed on condition that the continuous notice effect is not currently being executed. Since the continuous notice execution flag is already set after the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is executed in the already determined effect form without executing the continuous notice determination process again.

  If a super-reach or a start-up prize that results in a big hit occurs when a continuous notice effect is being executed based on the result of the determination of “Non-reach”, the super reach will be switched from the continuous notice effect that is currently being executed. Or a jackpot effect (for example, a reach notice or a jackpot notice) may be executed.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the continuous notice determination table. As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, different continuous notice determination tables are prepared according to the number of reserved memories and the gaming state. Among these, FIG. 44A shows a continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 4 used in the normal state. FIG. 44 (B) shows a continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 3 used in the normal state. FIG. 44 (C) shows a continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 2 used in the normal state. Further, FIG. 44 (D) shows a continuous notice determination table for probability change / time reduction used in the probability change state or the time reduction state.

  In step S6016, the effect control CPU 101 executes the change display of the first special symbol (for example, when neither the probability change state flag nor the time-short state flag is set and is in the normal state). The first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (see steps S652 and S658) is specified. In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (for example, when the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set and the probability change state or the time reduction state is set), the effect control CPU 101 performs the second hold. The second reserved storage number (see steps S655 and S661) stored in the storage number storage area is specified. Then, if the specified reserved memory count is 4, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice determination table for the reserved memory count 4 shown in FIG. Further, if the specified number of reserved memories is 3, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 3 shown in FIG. Further, if the specified number of reserved memories is 2, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice determination table for the number of reserved memories 2 shown in FIG. Furthermore, if the probability variation state flag or the time reduction state flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the probability change / time reduction continuous notice determination table shown in FIG.

  In step S6016, the effect control CPU 101 first extracts a random number for determining the continuous notice for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes the continuous notice effect by determining whether or not the extracted value of the continuous notice determination random number matches the determination value included in the selected continuous notice determination table. Decide whether or not. As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the ratio of the determination value is set to increase as the number of reserved memories increases, and the continuous notice effect is performed with a higher probability as the number of reserved memories increases. Decide to run.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), when the probability variation state or the short time state is set, the ratio of the determination value is set to be small, and when the probability variation state or the short time state is established. The ratio of the decision to execute the continuous notice effect is low. It should be noted that control may be performed so as not to determine that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the case of the probability change state or the short time state.

  In this embodiment, the case where the presence / absence of the continuous notice effect is determined according to whether or not the game state is the probability change state or the short time state is shown, but the method for determining the continuous notice effect according to the game state is shown. Is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, depending on whether or not it is controlled to a low-probability high-base state that is easy to win, although it is a low-probability state where the probability of a big hit is not increased, the presence or absence of the continuous notice effect is determined. Also good. Conversely, for example, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect is determined depending on whether or not it is controlled to a high-probability low-base state in which it is difficult to win a start even though it is a high-probability state with an increased probability of winning a big hit You may make it do. In this case, for example, when the low probability high base state or the high probability low base state is controlled, it may be determined that the continuous notice effect is not executed. Further, for example, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect may be determined depending on whether or not an error notification of the big prize opening error is being performed. It should be noted that the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect may be determined depending on whether other error notifications such as a full tank error are being performed, not only the big prize opening error.

  Further, as a method for determining the continuous notice effect based on the gaming state, whether to execute the continuous notice effect based on whether or not a new command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 may be determined. Good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined in step S6016 to execute the continuous notice effect (step S6017). If it is decided not to execute the continuous notice effect, the process is terminated as it is.

  If it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the continuous notice effect mode for determining the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6018). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines which of the determination values included in the continuous notice distribution table selected in steps S6007, S6011, S6012, S6014, and S6015 the extracted random number for determining the continuous notice effect mode. Is determined to determine the effect mode of the continuous notice effect (step S6019).

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a continuous notice distribution table showing distribution of continuous notice effects. If the current gaming state is the normal state and the value of the after-short-count counter is not 101 to 108, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice distribution table in the normal state shown in FIG. 45A selected in step S6014. Using A, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table A is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the winning determination result designation command. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 45 (A), it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change”. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 to the super CA 2-10 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “Super” When the winning determination result indicating that “reach is lost” is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Then, it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “effect change” or “holding ball change”. In addition, for example, the production control CPU 101 uses the winning determination result designation command as a variation pattern type of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (that is, “super 45 is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “0D (H)” or “10 (H)”). As shown in (A), it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” or “holding ball change”.

  Further, when using the continuous notice allocation table A, for example, the production control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by a winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 45 (A), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect form, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 uses the winning pattern determination result designation command as a variation pattern type of super CA 2-7 to super CA 2-10 based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (ie, “super When the winning determination result indicating that “reach is lost” is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. , It is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “supermarket” 45 is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “2D (H)” or “30 (H)”). As shown in (A), there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice.

  In addition, the specific content of the production | presentation aspect of each continuous notice production of "production change" and "holding ball change" is mentioned later.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is a probable change state, the effect control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table B in the probable change state shown in FIG. 45B selected in step S6007 to determine the received winning time. Based on the winning determination result indicated by the result designation command, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table B is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 45 (B), there is no allocation to the continuous notice effects in any of the production modes, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 to the super CA 2-10 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “Super” When the winning determination result indicating that “reach is lost” is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. , It is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and the continuous notice is not executed. In addition, for example, the production control CPU 101 uses the winning determination result designation command as a variation pattern type of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (that is, “super 45 is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “0D (H)” or “10 (H)”). As shown in (B), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and no continuous notice is executed.

  Further, when the continuous notice allocation table B is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 45 (B), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 uses the winning pattern determination result designation command as a variation pattern type of super CA 2-7 to super CA 2-10 based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (ie, “super When the winning determination result indicating that “reach is lost” is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Then, it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “effect change” or “holding ball change”. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “supermarket” 45 is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “2D (H)” or “30 (H)”). As shown in (B), it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” or “holding ball change”.

  Also, if the current gaming state is a short-time state and the value of the number-of-hours counter is not 92 to 100 (that is, even if a start winning is made while the first to 91st variation display is executed after transition to the short-time state) The production control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table C shown in FIG. 45C selected in step S6012, based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table C is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by a winning determination result designation command. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 45 (C), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 to the super CA 2-10 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “Super” When the winning determination result indicating that “reach is lost” is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. , It is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and the continuous notice is not executed. In addition, for example, the production control CPU 101 uses the winning determination result designation command as a variation pattern type of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (that is, “super 45 is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “0D (H)” or “10 (H)”). As shown in (C), there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice.

  Further, when the continuous notice allocation table C is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 by the winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 45 (C), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect form, and that no continuous notice is executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 uses the winning pattern determination result designation command as a variation pattern type of super CA 2-7 to super CA 2-10 based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (ie, “super When the winning determination result indicating that “reach is lost” is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Then, it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “effect change” or “holding ball change”. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “supermarket” 45 is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “2D (H)” or “30 (H)”). As shown in (C), it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” or “holding ball change”.

  Also, if the current gaming state is a short-time state and the value of the number-of-short-time counter is 92 to 100 (that is, even if the start winning is performed while the 92 to 100th variation display is executed after the transition to the short time state). The production control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 45 (D) selected in step S6011, based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined. Also, if the current gaming state is a short-time state and the power failure recovery flag is set (that is, a power failure occurs when the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state, then power supply to the gaming machine resumes In this case, the effect control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 45 (D) selected in step S6011, and determines the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. Based on the above, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table D is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the winning determination result designation command. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 45 (D), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 to the super CA 2-10 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “Super” 45 (D), a winning determination result indicating that “reach is lost” is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”). , It is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and the continuous notice is not executed. In addition, for example, the production control CPU 101 uses the winning determination result designation command as a variation pattern type of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (that is, “super 45 is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “0D (H)” or “10 (H)”). As shown in (D), there is no allocation for the continuous notice effects of any effect form, and it is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  When the continuous notice allocation table D is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 with a winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 45 (D), there is no allocation to any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 uses the winning pattern determination result designation command as a variation pattern type of super CA 2-7 to super CA 2-10 based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (ie, “super When the winning determination result indicating that “reach is lost” is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Then, it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “change in reserved ball”. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “supermarket” 45 is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “2D (H)” or “30 (H)”). As shown to (D), it determines to perform the continuous notice effect of the production | generation aspect of "holding ball change".

  The continuous notice distribution table D shown in FIG. 45 (D) is used when the game state is the short-time state, but the remaining number of short-time states is within eight times (until eight times of variable display is executed). The time-shortening state ends during this period. In this embodiment, since the total number of stored reserves can be stored up to 8 (that is, up to 8 total start winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 can be held), When the remaining number of time-saving states is within 8 times, the game state is in the time-saving state when determining the winning time, but the time-saving state is already in effect when the variable display subject to the winning-time determination is started. May have ended. Therefore, there is a possibility that the determination result at the time of winning and the determination result at the start of actual variation cannot be matched, and the continuous notice effect cannot be appropriately performed. For example, if a value of “220 to 229” is extracted as the random number for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern for deviation shown in FIG. 11C is based on the fact that the time is short when winning is determined. Even though it is determined that super-reaching has been lost (super CA 2-7 to super CA 2-10) using the type determination table 135C, when the variable display is actually started, the normal state is entered. Rather (as shown in FIGS. 11 (A) and 11 (B), normal CA2-5 and normal CA2-6 are determined), the winning determination result and the actual variation start determination result are matched. There is no possibility. Further, when the value of “90 to 190” is extracted as the random number for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern for deviation for probability variation / time reduction shown in FIG. In spite of determining non-reach out (non-reach CA2-3) using the type determination table 135C, when the variable display is actually started, the normal state is entered, so that a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream Normal reach may be executed (as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, it may be determined as non-reach CA2-2 or normal CA2-4 to CA2-6), and the determination result at the time of winning May not be consistent with the actual decision result at the start of change. As a result, the percentage that the change display subject to the determination at the time of winning the prize does not become a big hit or super reach becomes high, which may impair the player's expectation. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 (D), when the game state is the short-time state but the remaining number of short-time states is within eight times, The execution of the continuous notice effect is restricted so that only the continuous notice effect is performed, thereby preventing a situation that impairs the player's expectation.

  The continuous notice allocation table D shown in FIG. 45 (D) is also used when the gaming state is a short time state and the power failure recovery flag is set. In this embodiment, as described above, the RAM included in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by the backup power source, and the value of the time counter number counter is not stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and the power supply is resumed, when any winning determination result command is received, the effect control CPU 101 displays the change display after shifting to the time-saving state. It is not possible to correctly determine how many times it has been executed. Therefore, if power failure recovery is performed when the remaining number of time-saving states is 8 or less, there is a possibility that the result of determination at the time of winning is not consistent with the result of determination at the start of actual fluctuation. There is a risk that the player's expectation will be impaired. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 (D), even when the gaming state is the short-time state and the power failure is restored, only the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “reserved ball change” is performed. In order to prevent this, the execution of the continuous notice effect is regulated to prevent a situation in which the player's expectation is impaired.

  Also, if the current gaming state is the normal state and the value of the after-short-time counter is 101 to 108 (that is, even if a start winning is made while the 101st to 108th variation display is executed after shifting to the short time state). The production control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table E shown in FIG. 45 (E) selected in step S6015, based on the winning determination result indicated by the received winning determination result designation command. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous notice allocation table E is used, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning. When a winning determination result indicating that the pattern is a variation pattern type (that is, “non-reach” without a reach or a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream) is shown (specifically, the EXT data is “ In the case of “00 (H)”), as shown in FIG. 45 (E), there is no allocation to any continuous notice effect of any effect form, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 to the super CA 2-10 based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “Super” When the winning determination result indicating that “reach is lost” is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “07 (H)”), as shown in FIG. Then, it is decided to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “change in reserved ball”. In addition, for example, the production control CPU 101 uses the winning determination result designation command as a variation pattern type of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (that is, “super 45 is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “0D (H)” or “10 (H)”). As shown to (E), it determines to perform the continuous notice effect of the production | generation aspect of "holding ball change".

  Further, when using the continuous notice allocation table E, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 with the winning determination result designation command. (Ie, EXT data is “20 (H)”) (in other words, the EXT data is “20 (H)”. ”), As shown in FIG. 45 (E), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and that no continuous notice is executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 uses the winning pattern determination result designation command as a variation pattern type of super CA 2-7 to super CA 2-10 based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (ie, “super When the winning determination result indicating that “reach is lost” is shown (specifically, when the EXT data is “27 (H)”), as shown in FIG. , It is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect form, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 becomes the variation pattern type of super CA3-3 to super CA3-7 based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 by the determination result designation command at the time of winning (that is, “supermarket” 45 is displayed (specifically, when the EXT data is “2D (H)” or “30 (H)”). As shown in (E), it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and the continuous notice is not executed.

  The continuous notice allocation table E shown in FIG. 45 (E) is used when the number of times of the variable display executed after the time reduction state is ended and the gaming state is shifted to the normal state is still within eight times. It is. In this embodiment, since the total number of stored reserves can be stored up to 8 (that is, up to 8 total start winnings to the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 can be held), If the number of executions of the variable display is still within 8 even after the time-short state is ended, the game state is normally set when the variable display is started with respect to the reserved memory that has been held in the starting prize and held before that. Although it is in the state, there is a possibility that the gaming state is still in the short time state when the winning determination is made. For this reason, there is a possibility that the result of determination at the time of winning and the determination result at the start of actual fluctuation cannot be matched, and the continuous notice effect cannot be properly performed for the stored memory that has been won by starting before the time saving state is finished. For example, if the value of “90-190” is extracted as the random number for determining the variation pattern type and the winning time determination is performed for the reserved memory that has been won before starting the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set at the time of winning determination. In spite of having been determined to be non-reach deviation (non-reach CA2-3) using the variation pattern type determination table 135 for probability variation / shortening deviation shown in FIG. Since the transition to the normal state is started, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or normal reach may be executed (as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, non-reach CA2-2 or normal reach). CA2-4 to CA2-6 may be determined). Then, for example, in the case of configuring so that the continuous notice effect is executed on the condition that all the change indications are “non-reach” before the determination target (the subject of the continuous notice effect) is changed. When it is just after the short-time end, it is determined that all the winning judgment results are “non-reach” and the continuous notice effect is started. There is a possibility that the situation in which the fluctuation is interrupted occurs, the continuity of the continuous announcement effect is impaired, and the player's sense of expectation may be impaired. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 (E), when the game state is the normal state but the number of executions of the variable display after the completion of the time reduction state is still within eight times, The execution of the continuous notice effect is regulated so that only the continuous notice effect of the “change” effect mode is performed, thereby preventing a situation in which the player's expectation is impaired.

  In addition, when it is determined not to execute the continuous notice effect because there is no distribution in the continuous notice distribution tables A to E, control is performed so as not to execute the processes of steps S6023 and S6024 described later.

  Further, in this embodiment, the continuous notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice distribution table for determining the effect mode of the continuous notice effect are configured as separate tables. Although the case is shown, the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode are determined by one determination process using one table in which the presence / absence and the appearance mode of the continuous notice effect are associated with each other. Also good.

  Note that in this embodiment, even when a pseudo-ream is executed, there is a case where region division is performed and a change in effect in each of the areas A to C is accompanied. Is executed, in step S6019, it is possible to always determine the effect mode of “change in reserved ball”. If comprised in that way, the effect which changes the effect in each area | region AC will overlap in a pseudo-continuous and a continuous notice effect, and control which changes an effect at which timing is prevented is prevented. can do. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may select any one of the variation patterns for super reach (super CA3-3 to superCA3-7, super CA2-7 to super CA2− in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 10) is separately determined and a winning determination result designation command is transmitted, and the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the winning determination result indicated in the received winning determination result designation command. What is necessary is just to determine not only whether it becomes a super reach but also whether a pseudo-ream is accompanied, and to determine the production mode of the continuous notice effect in step S6019.

  On the other hand, when a pseudo-relation with a change in effect is executed in the variable display of the notice target, the effect mode of “effect change” may be determined without fail in step S6019. Also in this case, for example, in the same manner as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 may change any of the variation patterns for super reach (super CA3-3 to superCA3-7, super CA2 in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. −7 to super CA2-10) is individually determined, and the determination result designation command at the time of winning is transmitted, and the production control microcomputer 100 receives the winning time indicated by the received determination result at the time of winning determination result command. Based on the determination result, it is not only determined whether or not the super reach is reached, but also whether or not the pseudo-ream is accompanied, and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect may be determined in step S6019.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not “effect change” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in step S6019 (step S6020). If the “effect change” is not determined as the effect mode (that is, “change in the holding ball” is determined), the process proceeds to step S6023. When the “effect change” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 101 extracts an effect change pattern determination random number for determining the effect change pattern of the continuous notice effect of the effect change “effect change” ( Step S6021). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the extracted effect change pattern determination random number is included in the effect change pattern determination table for determining the effect change pattern according to the current number of reserved memories and the gaming state. The effect change pattern of the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is determined by determining whether or not it matches the determination value (step S6022).

  In this embodiment, when the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is executed, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into areas A to C, and predetermined in each area A to C. Production is performed. Then, in each variation display until the variation display for the advance notice arrives, the effect of any region changes for each variation display.

  46 to 48 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect change pattern determination table. Among these, FIG. 46 shows a specific example of the effect change pattern determination table used when the change display of the notice target is a big hit, and FIGS. 47 and 48 show the change display of the notice object being off. A specific example of the effect change pattern determination table used in this case is shown.

  In step S6022, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not it is determined that the super reach big hit is determined in step S6004. In this case, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the probability variation state flag or the time reduction state flag is set, and if neither the probability variation state flag nor the time reduction state flag is set (that is, in the normal state). ), The value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is extracted. That is, the fact that the normal state is the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol is frequently executed, it is determined that the continuous notice effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, 1 The value of the number of reserved memories is extracted. Further, if the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set (that is, if the probability change state or the time reduction state is set), the value of the second reservation storage number stored in the second reservation storage number storage area is extracted. In other words, since the probability display state or the short time state indicates that the second special symbol variation display is frequently executed, it is determined that the continuous notice effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation display is executed. Then, the value of the second reserved storage number is extracted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the jackpot effect change pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 46 according to the extracted number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number). For example, when the number of reserved memories is two, the effect control CPU 101 selects the jackpot effect change pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide which one to use. The fact that the number of reserved memories is two is the case where the variable display is executed only once before the variable display of the notice target arrives. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 1, after the start of the continuous notice effect, after the effect of the area A is changed in the first change display, the next change display becomes the change target display of the notice object. Reach big hit. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 2, after the start of the continuous notice effect, after the effect of the region B is changed in the first change display, the next change display becomes the change target display of the notice object. It will be a super reach big hit. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 3, after the start of the continuous notice effect, after the effect of the area C is changed in the first change display, the next change display becomes the change target display. It will be a super reach big hit.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is 3, the effect control CPU 101 selects the jackpot effect change pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide which one to use. The fact that the number of reserved memories is three is a case where the variable display is executed twice before the variable display of the notice target arrives. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 4, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area A changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area B changes in the second variable display, Furthermore, the next change display becomes a change display for the advance notice and becomes a super reach jackpot. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 5, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area B changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area A changes in the second variable display. In addition, the next variable display becomes the display of the target for the advance notice and becomes a super reach jackpot. Also, if it is decided to use the effect change pattern 6, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area B changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area C changes in the second variable display. In addition, the next variable display becomes the display of the target for the advance notice and becomes a super reach jackpot. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 7, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area C changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area B changes in the second variable display. In addition, the next variable display becomes the display of the target for the advance notice and becomes a super reach jackpot. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 8, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area C changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area A changes in the second variable display. In addition, the next variable display becomes the display of the target for the advance notice and becomes a super reach jackpot. Also, if it is decided to use the effect change pattern 9, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area A changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area C changes in the second variable display. In addition, the next variable display becomes the display of the target for the advance notice and becomes a super reach jackpot.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46B, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same area A and area B change, the effect change pattern 4 in which the effect changes in the order of the area A and the area B. The ratio is higher than the effect change pattern 5 in which the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region A. In addition, as shown in FIG. 46B, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same region B and region C change, the effect change pattern 6 in which the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region C. The ratio is higher than the effect change pattern 7 in which the effect changes in the order of the region C and the region B. In addition, as shown in FIG. 46B, in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same region C and area A change, the effect change pattern 8 in which the effect changes in the order of the region C and the region A. The ratio is higher than the effect change pattern 9 in which the effect changes in the order of the region A and the region C.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is four, the effect control CPU 101 selects the jackpot effect change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46C and determines the effect change pattern 10. . The fact that the number of reserved storages is four is a case where the variable display is executed three times before the target variable display is reached. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 10, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area A changes in the first variable display, the effect of the area B changes in the second variable display, In the second variation display, the effect of the region C is changed, and the next variation display becomes a notice display variation display and becomes a super reach jackpot.

  In this embodiment, when the effect changes in all effect areas of areas A to C when performing the continuous notice effect in the effect mode of “effect change”, area A, area B, and area are always changed. The production changes in the order of C. Note that even when the effects change in all the effect areas, the order in which the effects change may be different. In this case, for example, the effect changes in various orders such as an effect change pattern in which the effect changes in the order of region C, region B, and region A, and an effect change pattern in which the effect changes in the order of region B, region A, and region C. A variation pattern to be performed may be prepared in advance, and the order in which the effects change may be different even when the effects change in all the effect areas.

  Further, if it is determined that the super reach big hit is not reached (that is, if it is determined that the non-reach is lost or the super reach is lost), the effect control CPU 101 confirms the current number of reserved memories. In this case, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the probability variation state flag or the time reduction state flag is set, and if neither the probability variation state flag nor the time reduction state flag is set (that is, in the normal state). ), The value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is extracted. Further, if the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set (that is, if the probability change state or the time reduction state is set), the value of the second reservation storage number stored in the second reservation storage number storage area is extracted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the outlier effect change pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 according to the extracted number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number). To do. Then, for example, when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of reserved memories is two, the effect control CPU 101 selects the deviation effect change pattern determination table shown in FIG. The production change patterns 1 to 3 are determined. Further, for example, when the gaming state is the probability change state or the short-time state and the number of reserved memories is two, the effect control CPU 101 uses the failure effect change pattern determination table shown in FIG. Select one of the effect change patterns 1 to 3 and select it. When it is decided to use the effect change pattern 1, after the start of the continuous notice effect, after the effect of the area A is changed in the first change display, the next change display becomes the change target display of the notice object. Reach out of reach or super reach out. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 2, after the start of the continuous notice effect, after the effect of the region B is changed in the first change display, the next change display becomes the change target display of the notice object. Non-reach or super-reach. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 3, after the start of the continuous notice effect, after the effect of the area C is changed in the first change display, the next change display becomes the change target display. Non-reach or super-reach.

  Further, for example, when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of reserved memories is 3, the effect control CPU 101 selects the loss effect change pattern determination table shown in FIG. Then, it is determined which of the production change patterns 4-9. Further, for example, when the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state and the number of reserved memories is 3, the effect control CPU 101 uses the effect change pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. Select and determine which of the effect change patterns 4-9. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 4, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area A changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area B changes in the second variable display, Further, the next change display becomes a change display subject to notice, and the non-reach is lost or the super reach is lost. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 5, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area B changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area A changes in the second variable display. Further, the next variation display becomes a variation display subject to notice, and the non-reach or super-reach is lost. Also, if it is decided to use the effect change pattern 6, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area B changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area C changes in the second variable display. Further, the next variation display becomes a variation display subject to notice, and the non-reach or super-reach is lost. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 7, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area C changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area B changes in the second variable display. Further, the next variation display becomes a variation display subject to notice, and the non-reach or super-reach is lost. If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 8, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area C changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area A changes in the second variable display. Further, the next variation display becomes a variation display subject to notice, and the non-reach or super-reach is lost. Also, if it is decided to use the effect change pattern 9, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area A changes in the first variable display, and then the effect of the area C changes in the second variable display. Further, the next variation display becomes a variation display subject to notice, and the non-reach or super-reach is lost.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 48 (D), in this embodiment, even when the effects of the same area A and area B change, the effects are in the order of area A and area B. The ratio of the effect change pattern 4 that changes is lower than the effect change pattern 5 that changes the effect in the order of the region B and the region A. Further, as shown in FIGS. 48C and 48D, in this embodiment, even when the effects of the same region B and region C are changed, the effects are performed in the order of region B and region C. The ratio of the effect change pattern 6 that changes is lower than the effect change pattern 7 that changes the effect in the order of the region C and the region B. Further, as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 48 (D), in this embodiment, even if the effects of the same region C and area A change, the effects are performed in the order of region C and area A. The changing effect change pattern 8 is selected in a lower ratio than the effect change pattern 9 in which the effect changes in the order of the region A and the region C.

  For example, when the number of reserved memories is four, the effect control CPU 101 selects the effect change pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 48E and determines the effect change pattern 10. . If it is decided to use the effect change pattern 10, after the start of the continuous notice effect, the effect of the area A changes in the first variable display, the effect of the area B changes in the second variable display, In the second variation display, the effect of the area C is changed, and the next variation display becomes a notification display of the subject of advance notice, and non-reach or super reach is deviated.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 (A), 47 (B) and 48 (C), (D), the normal state (that is, the frequency of performing the variable display of the first special symbol). Is high), at least the effect change pattern (in this example, the effect change pattern 1, the effect change pattern 4, and the effect change pattern 5) in which the effect of the area A changes is selected as another effect change pattern. Higher than. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 47 (A), (B) and FIGS. 48 (C), (D), when the gaming state is a probabilistic state or a short-time state (that is, the frequency at which the second special symbol variation display is performed) Is high), at least the effect change pattern (in this example, the effect change pattern 3, the effect change pattern 6, and the effect change pattern 7) in which the effect of the region C changes is selected as another effect change pattern. Higher than. That is, in this embodiment, even when the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed, when the change display of the first special symbol is executed, after the effect of the region A changes When the rate of development to super reach is high and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the rate of development to super reach after the effect of region C changes is high. Therefore, since the proportion of which effect area changes changes depending on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. it can.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46 to 48, when the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed, the number of areas where the effect changes is fixed as it is depending on the number of reserved memories. (In this example, if the number of reserved memories is 4, the effect of 3 areas changes, and if the number of reserved memories is 3, the effect of 2 areas changes, and the number of reserved memories is If it is 2, the effect of one area changes). For example, even if the number of reserved memories is the same, the number of areas where the effect changes may be different. In this case, for example, when it is determined as Y in step S6020, first, the number-of-regions determination process for determining the number of regions where the effect changes is executed, and the processing of steps S6021, S6022 is executed based on the determined number of regions. The effect change pattern may be determined. In this case, for example, a lottery process using a random number may be performed based on the current number of reserved memories to determine the number of areas where the effect changes within the range of the number of reserved memories. For example, if the number of reserved memories is 4, one of the areas 1 to 3 is determined as the number of areas where the effect changes. If the number of reserved memories is 3, the number of areas where the effect changes is 1 to 2 areas. Any one may be determined. In this case, for example, the determination process may be executed so that the number of regions in which the effect changes is larger in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In addition, when configured to execute the number of areas determination process, the number of areas is determined regardless of the current number of reserved memories, and the number of areas may be determined beyond the range of the number of reserved memories. May be. For example, there may be a case where the number of reserved storage is 2 and the number of areas where the effect changes is determined to be 2 even though there is only 1 change until the change of the notice target. In this case, when the number of areas larger than the number of changes until the change of the notice target is determined, the effects of the plurality of areas may be changed in any change up to the change of the notice target (for example, In the area number determination process, the variation that changes the effect of the plurality of areas is also determined). For example, if the number of regions where the production changes is 2 even though there is only one change until the change of the notice target as described above, the production of the two areas in the one change before becoming the change of the notice target. It may be changed. In addition, for example, the effect of one area may be changed at the timing before reach in the change of the notice target. Also, for example, when the number of areas smaller than the number of changes until the change of the notification target is determined, the effect may not be changed in any change until the change of the notification target (for example, Fluctuations that do not change the effect are also determined in the area number determination process, and the variation display during the continuous notice effect in which the effect change is performed is thinned). By configuring in such a manner, it is possible to adjust the number of fluctuations until the change of the notice target and the number of areas where the production changes, and to prevent the situation where the production using the plurality of areas A to C cannot be performed. do it.

  Note that, as described above, when thinning out the variable display during the continuous notice effect in which the effect change is performed, for example, the expectation degree for the big hit depending on which of the plurality of changes the effect is not changed (Reliability) may be varied. Further, as described above, when changing the effect of a plurality of areas in one variation display during the continuous notice effect, for example, depending on which of the plurality of variations the effect of the plurality of areas is changed, You may vary the degree of expectation (reliability) for.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the case has been described in which all effects in the areas A to C change if the number of reserved memories is 4, even if the number of reserved memories is four. However, in the same way as when the variable display with pseudo-continuations using the change pattern of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-19 is executed, the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is also executed. If all the effects of A to C change, the jackpot may be determined. In this case, for example, as described above, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the number of areas determination process is executed to determine the number of areas where the effect changes. The number of areas may be determined to be either 1 or 2, and the number of areas in which the effect changes may be determined to be 3 only when a big hit.

  Further, as described above, when the area number determination process is executed to determine the number of areas in which the effect changes, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-19 is changed. Similarly to the case where the variable display with the pseudo-series used is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be increased as the number of regions where the production changes increases. In this case, for example, in the effect change pattern determination table for jackpot shown in FIG. 46, for the effect change patterns 4 to 9 in which the effects in the two regions change, the effect change patterns 1 to 1 in which the effect changes only in one region. On the contrary, with respect to the effect change patterns 4 to 9 in which the effects of the two regions change in the table for effect change pattern determination for losing shown in FIGS. It is sufficient to allocate a smaller determination value than the effect change patterns 1 to 3 in which the effect changes only in one region.

  Further, when the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is increased as the number of areas where the production changes increases, further, depending on which region is changed in which order the production is changed, The degree of expectation (reliability) may be different. For example, when the number of areas where the effects change is determined as two areas, even if the effects of the same area A and area B change, the effect change pattern 4 in which the effects change in the order of the areas A and B 46 to 48 are allocated so that the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit is higher than the effect change pattern 5 in which the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region A. May be.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, based on the winning determination result command specified by the winning determination result specifying command, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the notification target is super reach, and the continuous notice effect is executed. For example, based on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command, whether or not the change display of the notice target becomes super reach and the production of any region is changed. Further, it may be configured to execute the continuous notice effect by determining (for example, by preparing in advance a variation pattern that can also specify the region where the effect changes, and determining which variation pattern type it will be. By using this method, it is possible to pre-read which area the production of the notice is changed until the advance notice is displayed). In this case, the number of areas where the production changes beyond the range of the number of reserved memories may be specified from the winning determination result. For example, there may be a case where it is determined that the number of areas in which the production changes is 2 based on the winning determination result even though the number of stored memories is 2 and there is only 1 change until the change of the notice target. Good. In this case, for example, the effects in a plurality of areas may be changed in any change up to the change of the notice target. For example, when it is determined that the number of areas where the production changes even though there is only 1 change until the change of the notice target as described above, the production of the two areas in one change before the change of the notice target is determined. May be changed. In addition, for example, the effect of one area may be changed at the timing before reach in the change of the notice target. Also, for example, when the number of areas smaller than the number of changes until the change of the notice target is determined, the effect may not be changed in any change until the change of the notice target (effect The change display is thinned during the continuous notice effect where changes are made.) By configuring in such a manner, it is possible to adjust the number of fluctuations until the change of the notice target and the number of areas where the production changes, and to prevent the situation where the production using the plurality of areas A to C cannot be performed. do it.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode determined in step S6019 and the effect mode of “effect change”, it is executing the continuous notice effect according to the effect change pattern determined in step S6022. A continuous notice execution flag indicating the presence is set (step S6023). In this case, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 1 designation command shown in FIG. If the start winning is “non-reach”, a first off-preliminary continuous notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 8 designation command shown in FIG. If the start winning prize is “super-reaching”, the first reach continuous notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 14 designation command or the winning determination result 17 designation command shown in FIG. When a “super reach big hit” is made for the start winning at the first start winning opening 13, a first big hit continuous advance notice execution flag indicating that execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the determination at the time of winning is set. . Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result 21 designation command shown in FIG. When the start winning is “non-reach”, a second off-continuous notice execution flag indicating that the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 28 designation command shown in FIG. If the start winning prize is “super reach loss”, a second reach continuous notice execution flag indicating that execution of the continuous notice effect has been decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the continuous notice effect based on receiving the winning determination result 34 designation command or the winning determination result 37 designation command shown in FIG. When a “super reach big hit” is made for the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, a second big hit continuous notice execution flag is set indicating that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the determination at the time of winning. . Among these continuous notice execution flags, the first missed continuous notice execution flag, the first reach continuous notice execution flag, and the first big hit continuous notice execution flag are the first continuous notice execution flags. . Of these continuous advance notice execution flags, the second outlier continuous advance notice execution flag, the second reach continuous advance notice execution flag, and the second big hit continuous advance notice execution flag are second continuous advance notice execution flags. .

  In step S6023, a continuous notice execution flag is set, and information that can specify the effect mode determined in step S6019 and the effect change pattern determined in step S6022 is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the effect mode is “effect change” or a flag indicating “holding ball change” may be set. Further, for example, a flag indicating which of the effect change patterns 1 to 10 may be set. In addition, for example, when the continuous notice execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), the predetermined bit of the continuous notice execution flag indicates which effect mode or which effect change pattern. It may be possible to specify which effect mode or effect change pattern has been determined by setting a value that specifies the effect.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the current reserved memory number in the variation counter (step S6024). In this case, when the first continuous notice execution flag is set in step S6023, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first reserved storage number in the variation counter. If the second continuous notice execution flag is set in step S6023, the second reserved storage number is set in the variation counter. Note that the variation count counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays that are executed before the variation display for which the continuous notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined during the variation display of the effect symbol and the variation counter is set in step S6024, the variation display during the execution is ended first. Sometimes, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 (see step S876). As a result, the value of the variation counter becomes 0 until the variation display immediately before the variation display subjected to the winning determination. In step S6024, if the effect symbol variation display is not in progress, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current reserved storage number in the variation counter. With such a configuration, it is possible to always end the change in the production during the continuous notice effect until the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that is the object of the winning judgment. It is possible to prevent both the change of the production and the production of the super reach from being performed in the changed display, and the production is prevented from becoming unnatural.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the continuous notice step number counter for counting the number of steps of variable display during the continuous notice effect (step S6025).

  In this embodiment, the following prohibition process is performed for the continuous notice effect.

(1) If the game machine is a big hit when the power is turned on or the power is restored, the gaming state after the big hit game is indeterminate. Therefore, in such a case, control is performed so as to clear all the information on the current reserved memory number. In addition, it is configured not to clear the information on the number of reserved memory itself, but to clear information related to the reserved memory (for example, a winning determination result (determination result at the start winning prize) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer). May be.

(2) When there is a new start winning at the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 during the big hit game state, the game state after the big hit game is uncertain. Therefore, control is performed so as not to perform the process of executing the continuous notice effect for such a start winning prize (see step S216A). Also, control is performed so as not to stack the variation information of the number of reserved storage.

(3) In the case of a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, or a high probability state due to sudden probability variation big hit, a winning determination result designation command for determining a winning for the first winning winning opening 13 Is controlled so as not to be transmitted (see step S215A). In this case, even if the production control microcomputer 100 does not receive the winning determination result designation command, for example, the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command is used. The first winning determination result storage buffer and the second winning determination result storage buffer (see FIG. 40) based on the reserved storage number specified by the second reserved memory number addition designation command and the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command. It is sufficient to always specify to which storage area the storage area is in a state of having a reserved storage. When a new winning determination result specifying command is received, the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command may be stored in the storage area of the specified winning determination result storage buffer. Further, a command indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is transmitted to the probability change state or the short time state, and information indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is received based on the received command. The time determination result storage buffer or the second winning time determination result storage buffer may be stored in a corresponding storage area.

(4) When changing from the 92nd time to the 100th time after the transition to the short-time state, the remaining state is small until the end of the short-time state, and the gaming state and the actual state at the time of winning determination are determined by the timing of transition from the short-time state to the normal state There is a possibility that the game state at the time of change may not match. Therefore, even in the same short time state, when changing from the 92nd time to the 100th time, using a continuous notice allocation table different from the case of changing from the 1st time to the 91st time, Control is performed so that only the continuous notice effect of “ball change” is executed (see FIG. 45).

(5) Further, even when the power saving state is in the time-saving state, the same as (4) can be said because the remaining number of time-saving states is uncertain. For this reason, by using a continuous notice allocation table similar to the case of performing the change from the 92nd to the 100th time, control is performed so that only the continuous notice effect of “holding ball change” is executed.

(6) Further, when a start prize is received within an extremely short predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) after the start of the variable display, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect is not performed for the start prize (step in FIG. 35). S616A and steps S800A to S800E of FIG. 41).

(7) In addition, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect based on the non-reach losing and the determination at the time of winning is not continuously executed for a predetermined period. For example, when the continuous notice effect based on the determination at the time of winning the non-reach and the winning is finished, the next continuous notice effect based on the determination at the time of winning the non-reach and the winning until the variation display is finished 20 times or more thereafter. Control not to execute.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  50 and 51 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the continuous notice interrupting flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is being interrupted is set (step S8001). Note that the continuous notice interruption flag is set in step S8004 described later. If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination result at the time of winning for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. It is confirmed whether or not the first continuous notice execution flag is set (step S8002). The first continuous notice execution flag is set in step S6023 of the continuous notice effect determining process. If any of the first continuous notice execution flags is set (Y in step S8002), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S8003). ). If the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S8009. If the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 sets the continuous notice interruption flag (step S8004). It is to be noted that a winning determination result designation command (a winning determination result 21 designation command to a winning determination result 40 designation command; see FIG. 18 and FIG. 19) transmitted when a winning is won at the second starting prize opening 14 is received. On the basis of this, the continuous notice interruption flag may be set.

  As described above, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S8002 to S8004, the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the winning determination result for the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13. When the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, control is performed to interrupt the continuous notice effect.

  Note that if the second special symbol variation display (particularly, the deviation variation) is interrupted during the continuous announcement effect (in relation to the first special symbol variation display) of the “effect change” effect mode, the continuous notice effect itself. It is desirable that the effect display be continued in each region in the current effect state without changing the effect while being divided into the plurality of regions A to C. By doing so, even though the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into a plurality of regions and the effect is changed, the effect is unnatural by returning to the state where the region is not divided once. This can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In this case, since the number of productions of the continuous notice effect increases, the subtraction of the fluctuation number counter is not performed, and the continuous notice step number counter is not added. Control is performed so that the values of counters for managing the number of effects of the notice effect (for example, the number of fluctuation counters and the number of continuous notice steps) are matched, and the contents of the continuous notice effect and the change display of the notice object are shifted. Don't be stupid. If the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol executed by interruption is accompanied by super reach, the effect of the super reach corresponding to the region where the effect has changed so far is the first. It may be executed while the 2 special symbols are being displayed to end the continuous notice effect.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous special notice effect is being executed based on the winning determination result for the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13, when the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, Although the case where the continuous notice effect is interrupted is shown, the continuous notice effect may be continuously executed even during the variable display of the interrupted second special symbol without being interrupted. In the case of such a configuration, the processes in steps S8001 to S8008 in the effect symbol variation start process are not necessary.

  If the continuous notice interruption flag is set in step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S8005). If the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished and the variation display of the first special symbol is returned), the continuous notice interruption flag is reset. (Step S8006). Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the set first continuous notice execution flag is the first off-line continuous notice execution flag of the first continuous notice execution flags (step S8007). ). The first off-running continuous notice execution flag indicates that a continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination at the time of winning when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 becomes “non-reach out”. This flag is set as one of the first continuous notice execution flags in step S6023 of the continuous notice effect determining process. When the first deviation continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first deviation continuous notice execution flag (step S8008). In step S8008, the variation counter and the continuous notice step counter are also reset.

  On the other hand, if the flag for executing the first missed continuous advance notice is not set in step S8007 (in this case, if the start win to the first start winning opening 13 is “super reach miss” or “super reach big hit”, the prize is won. Based on the time determination, the first reach continuous notice execution flag or the first big hit continuous notice execution flag is set), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8009.

  As described above, when the processing of steps S8005 to S8008 is executed, the second special symbol variation display interrupts and the continuous notice effect is interrupted, and then the first special symbol variation display is restored. When the variation subject to time determination is “non-reach”, the continuous notice effect is ended without continuing the continuous notice effect. In addition, if the variation subject to determination at the time of winning is “Super reach out” or “Super reach jackpot”, after the display returns to the variation display of the first special symbol, the remaining continuous notice effect continues. Executed. With such a configuration, when returning to the continuous notice effect after the change display of the second special symbol has interrupted, at least super reach will be determined, and a big hit will be given to the player after super reach. Expectation can be raised.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8009). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step S8009 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8010). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8010, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 does not reach the chance symbol symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream. The combination of the big hit symbol of the object and the symbol in which one symbol is shifted) is also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 52, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop design as a stop symbol. A combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are even-numbered symbols (a stop symbol that usually reminds of the occurrence of a big hit) is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the production control CPU 101 uses odd symbols (probability variation) as 3 symbols as stop symbols. The combination of effect symbols arranged in a stop symbol reminiscent of the occurrence of a big hit) is determined. And in the case of detachment (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols (reach symbols) in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. When the received display result designation command suddenly shows a probable big hit or small hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control Determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as stop symbols. If a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern with reach is received in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the stop symbol “135” is determined and the reach symbol is also determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol. The effect control CPU 101 determines that the winning symbol is a stop symbol by specifying that it is a big hit, disappointment, suddenly probable big hit or small hit based on the variation pattern command, not the display result designation command. It may be. For example, when the variation control command for big hit is received, the effect control CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol with the same symbols on the left and right sides, and suddenly receives a variation pattern command for a probable big hit / small hit. Determines a stop symbol such as “135”, and when a variation pattern command for deviation is received, a symbol other than these may be determined.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol reminiscent of a normal big hit is called a normal big hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interruption flag is set (step S8011). If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to display a notice effect (a notice effect other than the continuous notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect or motif Display notice effect, group notice effect, button notice effect, mini character notice effect, etc.) is executed or a notice effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the notice effect is executed (step S8012). If the continuous notice interruption flag is set (Y in step S8011), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8013 without executing step S8012.

  In this embodiment, the continuous notice interruption flag is set because the second special symbol is displayed during execution of the continuous notice effect based on the result of determination at the time of winning for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. Is interrupted and the continuous notice effect is interrupted. Therefore, when the process of step S8011 is executed and the change display of the second special symbol is executed while interrupting in the middle of the continuous notice effect, the effect display device 9 is displayed during the change display of the second special symbol. Is controlled so as not to execute a notice effect other than a continuous notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect or a mini character notice effect. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed while interrupting in the middle of the continuous notice effect, as a result, neither the notice result of the continuous notice nor the notice effect other than the continuous notice effect is executed.

  Note that the continuous notice effect is set based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, whereas the notice effect setting process in step S8012 sets the notice effect for the variation started this time. Even if executed together with the notice effect, the effects are not necessarily bothered and duplicated. Therefore, regardless of whether the continuous notice effect is being executed or whether the continuous notice effect is being interrupted, the notice effect setting process in step S8012 is always executed, and the determination process in step S8011 is It may be unnecessary. Therefore, for example, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the notice effect is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. It may be.

  It should be noted that other notice effects such as step-up notice effects are not only executed during the interruption of the continuous notice effect, but also during execution of the continuous notice effect of the “change effect” effect mode. May not be executed. In this case, for example, even when the continuous notice execution flag corresponding to the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is set in step S8011, it is determined as Y and the process proceeds to step S8013 as it is. The determination of the notice effect in step S8012 may not be performed. By doing so, despite the fact that the display screen of the effect display device 9 has already been divided into a plurality of regions and the effect is being executed, other notice effects are executed redundantly, and on the contrary, each other's effect Can be avoided.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the continuous notice execution flag corresponding to the continuous notice production of the production mode of “production change” is set (step S8013). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is set and whether or not the flag indicating that the effect mode is “effect change” is set, or the continuous notice. When the running flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), confirm whether or not a value indicating “change in effect” is set in a predetermined bit of the continuous notice running flag. (See step S6023). If the continuous notice execution flag corresponding to the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S8020.

  If the continuous notice executing flag corresponding to the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interrupting flag is set. (Step S8014). If the continuous notice interruption flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8020.

  If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the variation counter is already 0 (step S8015). If the value of the variation counter is 0 (that is, if the current variation display is the variation display subject to the advance notice of the continuous announcement effect), the effect control CPU 101 designates the variation pattern command received this time. Regardless of the variation pattern being set, a process table for a predetermined continuous advance notice variation is selected (step S8016). In this case, if the current variation display is “Super reach big hit” or “Super reach miss”, the variation display before the variation display subject to the current announcement (each variation for which the continuous announcement effect was executed). In the display), a process table including a super reach effect corresponding to the area where the effect has changed (for example, an effect in which the female character displayed in the area where the effect has changed battles with the enemy character) is selected. . However, if the current variation display is “non-reach”, a process table that does not include the super reach effect is selected (for example, the effect mode of the region where the effect has changed by the previous variation display changes) Do not develop to super reach in the same manner). In the case of “super reach big hit” or “super reach off”, the pseudo pattern is designated by the fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation pattern of super PA3-1 to superPA3-19 is designated). ) Is not performed. By doing so, even if the change in the effect in each of the areas A to C is already performed in the continuous notice effect, the pseudo change is executed repeatedly to change the effect in each of the areas A to C. On the other hand, the production is made not to bother. Then, the production control CPU 101 resets the set continuous notice execution flag (step S8017), and proceeds to step S8021. In step S8017, the continuous notice step number counter is also reset.

  Note that, when the process table for the variable display of the notification target of the continuous notification effect is selected in step S8016, the setting of the super reach effect is started after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the variable display is started. The selected process table may be selected, or the process table set so that the production of the super reach may be started simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation may be selected.

  If the value of the variation counter is not 0 (that is, if the current variation display is a variation display before the notification subject of the continuous notice effect), the effect control CPU 101 sets the continuous notice step number counter to 1. Addition is performed (step S8018). Then, the effect control CPU 101, regardless of the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command received this time, the continuous notice effect according to the number of successive notice steps after addition and the effect change pattern determined in step S6022. Process table is selected (step S8019). In step S8019, the effect control CPU 101 changes the effect in the region A, the process table in which the effect in the region B is changed, or the effect in the region C, according to the number of continuous notice steps and the effect change pattern. Select one of the process tables. For example, when it is determined to use the effect change pattern 10 and the number of continuous notice steps is 1 (that is, when the first variable display during the continuous notice effect is executed), the region When the process table for changing the effect in A is selected and the number of continuous notice steps is 2 (that is, when the second variable display during the continuous notice effect is executed), the process for changing the effect in the region B When a table is selected and the number of continuous notice steps is three (that is, when the third variable display during the continuous notice effect is executed), a process table for changing the effect in the region C is selected. Then, control goes to a step S8021.

  In step S8020, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect when executing the variation pattern and the notice effect (step S8020). In step S8020, when the process table corresponding to the variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-19 with pseudo-continuations is selected, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into a plurality of areas A to C. Then, a process table is selected in which data for executing the presentation is set, and different data is set depending on which region the presentation changes. In step S8020, when a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 is selected (when the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is not being executed, super PB3-1 to When the super PB 3-2 is designated), the normal super reach effect (for example, in the areas A to C) different from the case where the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is executed. A process table in which an effect in which a character different from the displayed female character appears) is selected. Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S8016, S8019, and S8020 (step S8021).

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled.

  The process table shown in FIG. 53 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each variation pattern and notice effect. If it is determined that the notice effect is to be executed in the process of step S8012, data corresponding to the notice effect is set, the process table is selected, and it is not decided to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected. Further, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed and the continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the continuous notice effect in steps S8016 and S8019.

  Also, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, pseudo-stops, and temporary stop symbols in the sliding effect. May be.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect part for variably displaying effect symbols) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Then, the control of various lamps as the production component and the speaker 27) as the production component is started (step S8022). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In the case where the continuous notice effect of the effect mode “effect change” is executed and the first change display during the continuous notice effect is started (that is, when the number of continuous notice steps is 1). In accordance with the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8019, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into areas A to C, and predetermined effects for normal time are started in the areas A to C, respectively. In this case, for example, an effect in which the female character A is flying in the sky is started in the area A of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and an effect in which the female character B is walking on the ground in the area B. In the area C, the production of the aspect in which the female character C is shopping is started. It should be noted that the plurality of areas A are not divided into the areas A to C at the same time as the start of the first variable display, but the areas A to C are gradually lifted or inserted from the side of the screen. An effect that fades in C may be executed.

  Also, when a variation pattern command specifying a variation pattern including pseudo-ream and super reach is received (that is, when the variation display of the effect symbols is executed according to the variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-19). However, according to the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8020, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into areas A to C, and predetermined effects for normal time are started in the areas A to C, respectively. . In this case, for example, an effect in which the female character A is flying in the sky is started in the area A of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and an effect in which the female character B is walking on the ground in the area B. In the area C, the production of the aspect in which the female character C is shopping is started. The plurality of areas A to C are not divided into the areas A to C at the same time as the start of the variable display, but the areas A to C are gradually lifted or inserted from the side of the screen. An effect of fading in may be executed.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8023). Further, the production control CPU 101 deletes the first winning determination result (the winning determination result corresponding to the variable display executed this time) stored in the winning determination result storage buffer, and the winning determination result storage buffer stores the winning determination result storage buffer. The contents are shifted (step S8024). In this case, the production control CPU 101 executes the production symbol variation display in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol (specifically, when the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set). In this case, the first winning determination result stored in the first winning determination result storage buffer is deleted, and the contents of the first winning determination result storage buffer are shifted. In addition, when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set), at the time of the second winning The first winning determination result stored in the determination result storage buffer is deleted, and the contents of the second winning determination result storage buffer are shifted.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8025).

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  In addition, when executing the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change”, the process of step S8105 is executed according to the process data of the process table selected in step S8019, for example, the effect display device 9 A predetermined effect is executed in each of the areas A to C on the display screen, and the variable display of the effect symbols is reduced and displayed in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In addition, an effect in which the effect changes in any of the areas A to C at a predetermined timing after the start of change (for example, one second after the start of change) is executed.

  In addition, after the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed, if the variable display subject to the notice is executed, the process of step S8105 is performed according to the process data of the process table selected in step S8016. By executing the process, the super reach effect corresponding to the area where the effect has changed so far is executed. For example, if the effects of the area A and the area B have changed in the continuous notice effects that have been executed so far, the super in a mode in which the female character displayed in the area A and the area B battles with the enemy character. Reach production is executed. In addition, for example, if the effects of all the areas A to C have changed in the continuous notice effects that have been executed so far, the female character displayed in all the areas A to C battles with the enemy character. The production of super reach is executed.

  Also, when a variation pattern command specifying a variation pattern including pseudo-ream and super reach is received (that is, when the variation display of the effect symbols is executed according to the variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-19). In addition, by executing the process of step S8105 according to the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S8020, for example, a predetermined effect is executed in each of the areas A to C on the display screen of the effect display device 9. In the effect symbol display area provided in the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the variable display of the effect symbols is reduced and displayed. In addition, in the case of executing the first variation of the pseudo-continuous, an effect in a form in which the effect of any one of the areas A to C is changed is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is a case where a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern including a pseudo-ream is received (step S8106). If the pseudo-ream is executed, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the temporary stop timing of the temporary stop symbol is reached (step S8107). Specifically, whether or not it is a temporary stop timing can be determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If it is the temporary stop timing, the CPU 101 for effect control temporarily displays the temporary stop symbol determined in step S8010 according to the number of temporary stop timings during the variable display (step S8108).

  If it is not the temporary stop timing of the temporary stop symbol, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is the timing of re-variation after the temporary stop (step S8109). Whether or not it is the timing of re-variation can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variation time timer. If it is the timing of re-variation, the CPU 101 for effect control adds 1 to the re-variation number counter for counting the number of re-variations of the effect symbol during the variable display with pseudo-continuity (step S8110). Next, the effect control CPU 101 switches process data in accordance with the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command and the value of the re-variation number counter after addition (step S8111), and restarts the process timer. (Step S8112).

  Thereafter, the process of step S8105 is executed in accordance with the process data switched in step S8111, whereby an effect of re-changing the temporarily stopped effect symbol is executed. If a variation pattern including a pseudo-ream and a super reach is designated (that is, a variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-19 is designated), the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. A mode in which an effect symbol displayed in a reduced scale in an effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the image is re-variable, and the effect of any of the areas A to C changes according to the number of re-variations The production is executed.

  If it is not the timing of re-variation, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a predetermined reach start time has elapsed (step S8113). Whether or not a predetermined reach start time has elapsed can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer. If the predetermined reach start time has elapsed, the production control CPU 101 switches the process data for reach (step S8114). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the re-variation number counter (step S8115) and restarts the process timer (step S8116).

  Thereafter, the process of step S8105 is executed in accordance with the process data switched in step S8114, whereby the reach effect is executed in the final variation of the pseudo-continuous. If a variation pattern including a pseudo-ream and a super reach is designated (that is, a variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-19 is designated), the areas A to C are merged. The effect area of the super reach (for example, the effect that the female character displayed in the area where the effect has changed battles with the enemy character) is executed in the effect region that is combined. The

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice execution flag corresponding to the continuous notice effect of the “pending ball change” effect mode is set (step S8117). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is set, and whether or not the flag indicating that the production mode is “reserved ball change” is set. If the advance notice flag is composed of multiple bits (for example, 1 byte), check whether or not a value indicating “change in holding ball” is set in a predetermined bit of the continuous advance notice flag. This can be determined (see step S6023). If the continuous advance notice execution flag corresponding to the continuous advance notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous advance notice interrupting flag is set (step) S8118). If the continuous notice interrupting flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to execute the continuous notice effect in the effect of “change in reserved ball” (step S8119). In addition, when it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect, specifically, the continuous notice effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the change of the effect symbol. The When executing the continuous notice effect, the process of step S8119 is executed on the condition that the continuous notice effect is determined as Y in step S8117 and the continuous notice interruption flag is not set. . Then, it is determined to be Y repeatedly in step S8117 until the continuous notice effect is finished, and the process of step S8119 is executed. On the other hand, if the continuous notice interruption flag is set in step S8118 (that is, if the continuous notice effect is being interrupted), the process proceeds to step S8120 without executing step S8119.

  Then, if the variation time timer has timed out (step S8120), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8121).

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the handling when the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect is executed based on the winning determination result for the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13. is there. Among these, FIG. 55 (A) shows the handling when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect of “effect change” is being executed. FIG. 55 (B) shows the handling when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change” is being executed.

  In this embodiment, when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, the continuous notice effect is given. Is interrupted (see step S8004). In this case, if the change in the first special symbol for which the reason for the execution of the interrupted continuous notice effect is determined is due to the determination at the time of winning as “non-reach”, the second special symbol Even if the change display is ended and the display returns to the change display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 55, the continuous advance notice effect is ended without restarting the interrupted continuous notice effect (Y in step S8007). , S8008). In addition, when the variation of the first special symbol is due to the determination of winning out of “super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot”, the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated and the first special symbol is terminated. When the display returns to the fluctuation display, the remaining continuous notice effect is resumed and executed as shown in FIG. 55 (see N in step S8007). However, if the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol executed while interrupting the continuous notice effect is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 55, the interruption is performed regardless of the reason for executing the interrupted continuous notice effect. The continuous notice effect is terminated as it is without restarting the continuous notice effect (see step S978 described later).

  As shown in FIG. 45, when it is determined at the time of winning that the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is “non-reach”, a continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change” is executed. There is no case. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the change in the first special symbol whose determination is based on the execution reason of the interrupted continuous notice effect is determined to be “non-reach out” at the time of winning. Since there is no case where the continuous notice effect is executed, there is no problem that the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted and executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variation display of the second special symbol interrupts during execution of the continuous announcement effect, It is controlled so as not to execute (the effect of giving a notice for the variable display of the second special symbol) (see Y in step S8011).

  In this embodiment, when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect is executed based on the winning determination result for the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13, the continuous display is interrupted. This shows the case where the notice effect is temporarily interrupted and resumed or finished after the second special symbol's variable display ends. However, if the second special symbol's variable display interrupts, the setting of the continuous notice effect is cleared and the continuous notice is given. You may comprise so that an effect may be complete | finished uniformly.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S871). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S884. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S883. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S885. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S871 is a stage where the fanfare effect has not yet been executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, so the stop symbol of the effect symbols in steps S872 to S873 is displayed. The process proceeds to step S884 without repeatedly executing the processes.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (disconnected symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) (step S872). The production control CPU 101 may perform control to stop and display the production symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  It should be noted that, when the variable display that is the subject of advance notice of the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is terminated and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display including the pseudo-ream and super reach (that is, super PA3-1) When the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed after the completion of the variation display according to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-19, the effect symbol that is reduced and displayed at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 The display area is enlarged to the entire display screen of the effect display device 9, and the final stop symbols of the effect symbols are stopped in the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas in the enlarged effect symbol display area. Is displayed. Accordingly, the display screen of the effect display device 9 returns from the state where the display screen is divided into the areas A to C to the state where the display screen is not divided, and thereafter, the effect shifts to the effect where the display screen is not divided. It should be noted that a plurality of areas A to C are gradually faded and disappeared or pushed to the side of the screen, instead of suddenly leaving the area undivided at the end of the variable display. An effect that fades out the areas A to C may be executed.

  If neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in step S872 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed: N in step S873), the effect control CPU 101 sets one of the continuous notice execution flags. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S874). If it is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interruption flag is set (step S875). If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (step S876).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice execution flag corresponding to the continuous notice production of the “reserved ball change” production mode is set (step S877). Specifically, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice execution flag is set, and whether or not the flag indicating that the production mode is “reserved ball change” is set. If the advance notice flag is composed of multiple bits (for example, 1 byte), check whether or not a value indicating “change in holding ball” is set in a predetermined bit of the continuous advance notice flag. This can be determined (see step S6023). If the continuous notice execution flag corresponding to the continuous notice effect of the “pending ball change” effect mode is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter after subtraction is zero. (Step S878). If the value of the variation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set continuous notice execution flag (first continuous notice execution flag or second continuous notice execution flag). (Step S879). In step S879, the continuous notice step number counter is also reset. When the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed, as described above, if the value of the fluctuation counter is 0, the continuous notice execution is performed in step S8017 of the effect symbol change start process. The middle flag is reset.

  By executing the processing as described above, in this embodiment, for example, when executing the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change”, the variation that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is started. An effect that changes the effect of any area in the continuous notice effect until the previous change display is executed, and the continuous notice execution flag is set at the start of the change display subject to the determination at the time of winning. It is reset (the effect of any area is not changed during the variable display that is the object of the determination at the time of winning). It should be noted that an effect that changes the effect of any region may be executed even during the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the number-of-times-after-time counter (step S880). It should be noted that the measurement processing of the number-of-times-after-time counter in step S880 may be executed only when the gaming state is shifted to the time-saving state.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S881). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets a command reception flag such as a display result designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 49, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). In step S881, the re-variation number counter is also reset.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S882).

  When displaying a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol in step S872 (Y in step S873), the production control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S883) and checks whether the fanfare flag is set. (Step S884). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S884), the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S885).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is a big hit (including a sudden probability variation big hit) (step S886). Whether or not it is a big hit can be specifically determined by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is a big hit, the CPU 101 for effect control clears the counter for the number of times after time reduction for counting the number of fluctuations after the shift to the time reduction state (step S887). That is, if it is a big hit (probability big hit, normal big hit or sudden probability change big hit), there is a possibility of shifting to the short-time state after the big hit game is finished, so the number-of-short-time counter is reset. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S880, S886, and S887, it is possible to count the number of executions of the variable display after shifting to the time reduction state.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S888), and starts a process timer (step S889). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S890). However, if it is a small hit, it is not a big hit. Therefore, the big hit display process (step S804) to the big hit end effect process (step S807) is not executed but set in step S888. It is preferable that an effect corresponding to the small hit game is executed over a predetermined effect period in accordance with the process data, and the process returns to the variation pattern command reception waiting process in step S800.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open display command has been received (that is, the big prize opening at the start of round 1). Whether or not a display command during opening has been received is confirmed (step S901). When the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect devices (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, etc.) in accordance with the contents of the process data n (step S903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot symbol and performs an effect of displaying characters or characters indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control CPU 101 resets the special winning opening open flag (step S907), and the contents of the special winning opening open display command are displayed. Based on this, process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S908). Then, the process timer is started (step S909), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the mid-round process (step S805) (step S910).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot game (step S971). The production period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all rounds of the big hit game have been completed, for example, during production during round (see step S805) or post-round processing (see step S806). Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the production period measurement timer has timed out (step S972).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S972), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S973), and the production device (production display device 9) according to the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27 etc.) is executed (step S974). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S975), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S977).

  When the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S972), the production control CPU 101, if set, has a continuous advance notice execution flag (in this embodiment, a first off-continuous advance notice execution flag, The one-reach continuous notice execution flag or the first big hit continuous notice execution flag) and the continuous notice interruption flag are reset (step S978). In step S978, the variation counter and the continuous notice step counter are also reset. When the process of step S978 is executed and the change display of the second special symbol is executed in the middle of the continuous notice effect, and the change display result of the second special symbol is a big hit. Is controlled to end the continuous notice effect as it is without continuing the interrupted remaining continuous notice effect.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S979). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets a command reception flag such as a display result designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S980).

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect will be described. FIG. 59 and FIG. 60 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. Among these, FIG. 59 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “effect change”. FIG. 60 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change”. 59 and 60, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3). In the example shown in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, a determination at the time of winning is made with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, and the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, a continuous notice effect is shown, but the determination at the time of winning is made for the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, and the change of the effect symbol is synchronized with the change display of the second special symbol. Even when the continuous notice effect is performed while the display is being executed, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner.

  First, with reference to FIG. 59, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “effect change” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 59, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 59 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S217A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S218A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 59 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 decides execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, and decides “production change” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. It is assumed that the change pattern 10 has been determined (see step S800E). Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S872).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 59 (4), in the first reserved memory display section 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the display screen of the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 59 (4) based on the fact that “effect change” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. While dividing into the areas A to C, the effect symbol display area is reduced and displayed on the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 to start the variable display of the effect symbols. Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (4), the effect in the area A is changed based on the fact that the effect change pattern 10 is determined and the first variable display during the continuous notice effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (5), the fluctuation time ends and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S872).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 59 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (6), the effects are continuously executed in the areas A to C while being divided into the areas A to C, and the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. The effect symbol display area is reduced and displayed in the lower right end portion, and the effect symbol variation display is executed. Since the effect of area A has already changed in the previous variation display, the effect after the change is continuously executed in area A as shown in FIG. 59 (6). Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (6), the effect in the region B is changed based on the fact that the effect change pattern 10 is determined and the second variable display during the continuous notice effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (7), the fluctuation time ends and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S872).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 59 (8), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 59 (8), the effects are continuously executed in the areas A to C while being divided into the areas A to C, and the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. The effect symbol display area is reduced and displayed in the lower right end portion, and the effect symbol variation display is executed. Since the effects of area A and area B have already been changed in the previous variable display, the changed effects are continuously executed in area A and area B, as shown in FIG. 59 (8). The Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (8), the effect in the region C is changed based on the fact that the effect change pattern 10 is determined and the second change display during the continuous notice effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (9), the fluctuation time ends and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S872).

  Thereafter, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is started. Then, when the display of the subject of advance notice of the next continuous notice effect is started, the effects (in each of the areas A to C are respectively divided in the areas A to C in the same manner as in FIG. 59 (8)). The effect after the change) is continuously executed, and the effect symbol display area is reduced and displayed on the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 so as to execute the effect symbol variation display. When the reach start timing is reached, a super reach effect corresponding to the region in which the effect has changed among the regions A to C is executed (however, a continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning “non-reach” is executed). In some cases, Super Reach is not performed.) Furthermore, the notice effect in the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 60, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (2), when the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 60 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S217A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see step S218A). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command (see step S218A), and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received first hold as shown in FIG. 60 (2). Based on the memory number addition designation command, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is incremented by 1 (see step S653). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, and decides the “reserved ball change” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. (See step S800E). Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S872).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 60 (4), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60 (4), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the variation of the production symbol based on the fact that “reserved ball change” is determined as the production mode of the continuous notice production. Then, the display of the first reserved memory number which is the object of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is changed to a display different from the normal display (star display in the example shown in FIG. 60 (4)). Step S8119). In the example shown in FIG. 60, after the determination at the time of winning is performed, the case where the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “reserved ball change” is started from the time of the next start of variation display is shown. When the determination result designation command is received (at the timing when the start winning is generated), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is changed to a display different from the normal display and the continuous notice effect is performed. You may make it start. Then, the fluctuation time is finished, and the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 60 (5)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (5) (see step S872). As shown in FIG. 60 (5), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c continues to be displayed in a mode different from the normal (FIG. 60). 60 (5), star display).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 60 (6), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “holding ball change” has been determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the first hold storage during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 60 (6). In the display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is continuously displayed in a different form (star display in the example shown in FIG. 60 (6)) (see step S8119). Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 60 (7), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 73 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see step S872). In addition, as shown in FIG. 60 (7), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 60). 60 (7), star display).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 60 (8), in the first reserved memory display unit 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that the “pending ball change” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the first hold storage during the effect symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 60 (8). In the display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is continuously displayed in a different form (star display in the example shown in FIG. 60 (8)) (see step S8119). Then, after the fluctuation time is over, as shown in FIG. 60 (9), the final stop symbol (the dismissed symbol in FIG. 60 (9)) is stopped and displayed (see step S872). As shown in FIG. 60 (9), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a mode different from the normal (FIG. 60). 60 (9), star display).

  In the above-described manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is started.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous notice effect of “holding ball change” is executed, the display of the hold memory to be notified is changed (star display in this example) at the timing of starting the variable display. However, the production timing of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change” is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the display of the hold memory may be displayed differently from the other (for example, a star display) at the timing of displaying the hold memory. In this case, for example, at the timing when a new reserved memory is generated and a winning determination result specifying command is received together with the reserved memory number addition specifying command, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect of “change in holding ball”. Thus, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect of “holding ball change” is to be executed, the hold memory to be newly displayed immediately without waiting for the start of the next variable display is displayed in a display mode different from other hold memories (for example, a star Display in the form). In addition, when comprised in this way, the process of step S8117-S8119 of an effect symbol change process is performed, and the display of the hold memory under display is changed regarding the continuous notice effect of "holding ball change" etc. There is no need to perform the process.

  Further, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect of the two types of effect modes of “effect change” and “holding ball change” has been described, but the effect form of the continuous notice effect is the same as that shown in this embodiment. I can't catch it. For example, an effect that indicates whether or not the effect mode is shifted in the variable display during the continuous notice effect (for example, a background screen that suggests a different effect mode is interrupted and confused with the original background screen) It may be configured to be able to execute the continuous notice effect of the “mode transition” effect mode that executes the mode effect), or to count down toward the variable display of the notice target during the continuous notice effect. You may comprise so that the continuous notice effect of the production aspect of "countdown" can be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern (super PA 3-1 to super PA 3-19 shown in FIGS. 6 and 7) with pseudo-ream and super reach is determined as the fluctuation pattern, the change of the production symbol There may be a case where a pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the display, and an effect similar to the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode when the pseudo-ream and super reach are executed. In addition, in FIG. 61, the aspect of an effect screen changes in order of (1) (2) (3) .... In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 61, a case is shown in which pseudo-continuation is performed when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. In the case where the pseudo-run is performed when the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the pseudo-run, the pseudo-run is executed in the same effect mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 61 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first reserved memory number addition designation command based on the newly received start prize (see step S218A). Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the production control microcomputer 100 displays the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 18c based on the received first reserved memory number addition designation command. Increase by 1 (see step S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S872).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 61 (4), in the first reserved memory display section 18c. The display of the first reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (see step S656), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 has received a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern with pseudo-ream and super reach. In this example, it is assumed that, as an example, a variation pattern command that specifies a variation pattern of the super PA 3-19 is received. In this case, as shown in FIG. 61 (4), the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into regions A to C, and the effect symbol display region is reduced to the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Display and start changing the display of the effect design. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a chance symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the production symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern command that designates the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-ream. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (4), the effect in the region A is changed based on the fact that the variation pattern of the super PA 3-19 is designated and the first variation. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (5), when the temporary stop timing of the temporary stop symbol comes, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts re-variation of the production symbol as shown in FIG. 61 (6). In this case, as shown in FIG. 61 (6), the effects are continuously executed in the areas A to C while being divided into the areas A to C, and the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. The effect symbol display area is reduced and displayed in the lower right end portion, and the effect symbol variation display is executed. Since the effect in area A has already changed due to the previous initial fluctuation, the effect after the change is continuously executed in area A as shown in FIG. 61 (6). Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (6), the effect in the region B is changed based on the fact that the change pattern of the super PA 3-19 is specified and the first change again. In addition, since it is not a case where a new fluctuation | variation is started, as shown to FIG. 61 (6), the display of the 1st reservation memory number in the 1st reservation memory display part 18c does not change. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (7), when the next temporary stop symbol is reached, the chance symbol is displayed temporarily.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts re-variation of the production symbol as shown in FIG. 61 (8). In this case, as shown in FIG. 61 (8), the effects are continuously executed in the areas A to C while being divided into the areas A to C, and the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. The effect symbol display area is reduced and displayed in the lower right end portion, and the effect symbol variation display is executed. Since the effects of area A and area B have already changed due to the first change up to the previous time and the first re-change, as shown in FIG. 61 (8), the effects after the change are made in area A and area B. Is executed continuously. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (8), the effect in the region C is changed based on the fact that the change pattern of the super PA 3-19 is designated and the second change again. In addition, since it is not a case where a new fluctuation | variation is started, as shown to FIG. 61 (8), the display of the 1st reservation memory number in the 1st reservation memory display part 18c does not change. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (9), when the next temporary stop timing is reached, the chance symbol is displayed temporarily.

  The pseudo-continuous effect is executed by repeatedly executing the temporary stop display of the chance symbol and the re-variation in the above manner. Then, when the next third re-variation is started, effects (changed effects) are respectively generated in the areas A to C while being divided into the areas A to C in the same manner as in FIG. 61 (8). ) Is continuously executed, and the effect symbol display area is reduced and displayed on the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the effect symbol variation display is executed. Then, at the reach start timing, a super reach effect corresponding to the region where the effect has changed among the regions A to C is executed. Thus, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect of “effect change” shown in FIG. 59 and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 61 are executed in a common effect mode. Therefore, even if the same aspect of the effect is executed, the player can be given a sense of expectation that it may be a continuous notice effect or may be a pseudo-ream, and the interest in the game can be improved. it can.

  Next, when the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed, or when the effect of the predetermined effect executed in each of the areas A to C is executed when the pseudo-ream and super reach effects are executed. A more specific example will be described. FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 are explanatory views showing more specific examples of the effect modes of predetermined effects executed in the areas A to C on the display screen of the effect display device. Among these, FIG. 62 shows a specific example in the case where the effects of the regions A and B among the regions A to C change. FIG. 62 shows a specific example in the case where all effects in the areas A to C change. 62 and 63, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 62, a case where the effects of the regions A and B among the regions A to C change will be described. In this embodiment, when starting the first variable display during the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode, or when starting the variable display with pseudo-ream and super reach, FIG. ), The display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into three effect areas (areas A to C), and predetermined effects are started in the areas A to C, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (1), an effect in which the female character A201 is flying in the sky is executed in the “middle” region A301, and the female character B202 is on the ground in the “left” region B302. The effect of walking is executed, and the effect of the aspect in which the female character C203 is shopping is executed in the “right” region C303.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (1), a predetermined effect is executed in the area A301 to the area C303 on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In the provided effect symbol display area 400, the effect symbol variation display is reduced. In the example shown in FIG. 62, as an example, a case will be described in which the effect change pattern 4 or the change pattern of the super PA 3-13 that changes the effect in the order of the region A301 and the region B302 is selected. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62 (7) and FIG. 63 (10) described later, in this embodiment, when the change display that is the subject of the notice of the continuous notice effect is ended, or the final change of the pseudo-ream is ended. In this case, the effect symbol display area 400 is enlarged on the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, but the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is always shown. In the effect symbol display area 400 provided in the above, the effect symbol variation display and the final stop symbol stop display may be reduced and displayed.

  Next, when it becomes the predetermined area A effect switching timing during the first change display of the first change display during the continuous notice effect or the change display with the pseudo-ream, as shown in FIG. 62 (2), the effect mode of the area A301 However, the production is switched from the production in which the female character A201 is flying in the sky to the production in which the female character A201 is trained by being hit by a waterfall in preparation for the battle. Next, after the effect of the area A301 is changed, when it becomes the predetermined area B effect switching timing during the second re-variation display during the continuous notice effect or the first re-variation of the fluctuating display accompanied by the pseudo-ream, FIG. As shown in 2), the production mode of the area B302 is switched from the production mode in which the female character B202 is walking on the ground to the production mode in which the training is performed by hitting a waterfall in preparation for a battle.

  Then, after the effect in the region B302 is changed, when a predetermined super reach start time during the second re-variation of the variation display of the notification subject of the continuous announcement effect or the variation display accompanied by the pseudo-continuation elapses, FIG. ), The areas A301 to C303 are combined into one effect area, and the effect of super reach is started in the combined effect area. In the example shown in FIG. 62, the effects of the two areas A301 and B302 have changed, so as shown in FIG. 62 (3), the female character 201 and area B302 displayed in area A301. The effect that the female character 202 displayed on the screen starts a battle with the enemy character 204 is started. In the effect symbol display area 400 provided in the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the left and right are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, the same symbol of “7”) and the reach state is reached. Become.

  In FIG. 62 (3), various timings can be considered as the timing at which the areas A301 to C303 are combined into one effect area. For example, after reaching the reach state in the effect symbol display area 400 provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the area A301 to the area C303 are combined to produce the effect of super reach as one effect area. You may start. Also, for example, conversely, the areas A301 to C303 are first combined into one effect area, and the reach state is displayed in the effect symbol display area 400 provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Also good.

  Next, in the production of super reach, as shown in FIG. 62 (4), for example, the female character 201 and the enemy character 204 battle, and if it is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 62 (5), The female character 201 strikes the enemy character 204, and as shown in FIG. 62 (6), an effect is presented that wins the battle. In the case of being out of place, for example, in FIGS. 62 (5) and (6), an effect may be performed in which the female character on the other hand is blown against the enemy character and defeated in the battle. .

  Then, when the change display subject to the advance notice of the continuous notice effect is finished, or when the last change of the pseudo-continuation is finished, the effect symbol display area 400 is displayed in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. And the big hit symbol is finally stopped and displayed in a state where all the left, middle and right effect symbols are aligned with the same symbol (the same symbol “7” in this example) (see step S872).

  In the example shown in FIG. 62, the case where the female character A201 performs a battle among the female character A201 and the female character B202 that are respectively displayed in the region A301 and the region B302 in which the effects are changed is shown. The aspect of the production of super reach is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the effects of two regions change, first, after performing an effect in which one of the two female characters battles and loses the battle, You may make it a big hit by performing the effect that a female character has battled and won the battle. In addition, for example, instead of each female character individually performing a battle, an effect may be executed such that two female characters attack an enemy character at the same time.

  Next, a case where all effects in the areas A to C are changed will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, when starting the first variable display during the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode, or when starting the variable display with pseudo-ream and super reach, FIG. ), The display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into three effect areas (areas A to C), and predetermined effects are started in the areas A to C, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), an effect in which the female character A201 is flying in the sky is executed in the “middle” region A301, and the female character B202 is on the ground in the “left” region B302. The effect of walking is executed, and the effect of the aspect in which the female character C203 is shopping is executed in the “right” region C303.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), a predetermined effect is executed in the area A301 to the area C303 on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In the provided effect symbol display area 400, the effect symbol variation display is reduced. In the example shown in FIG. 63, a case will be described in which the effect change pattern 10 or the change pattern of the super PA 3-19 that changes all effects in the region A301, the region B302, and the region C303 is selected.

  Next, at a predetermined area A effect switching timing during the first variation display during the continuous announcement effect or the first variation display with pseudo-ream, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), the effect mode of the area A301 However, the effect is switched from the effect that the female character A201 is flying in the sky to the effect that the weapon (in this example, “槍”) is picked up in preparation for the battle. Next, after the effect of the area A301 is changed, when it becomes the predetermined area B effect switching timing during the second re-variation display during the continuous notice effect or the first re-variation of the fluctuating display accompanied by the pseudo-ream, FIG. 3) As shown in 3), the effect of the region B302 is the effect of taking the weapon (in this example, “sword”) in preparation for the battle from the effect of the female character B202 walking on the ground. Switch to Furthermore, after the effect of the region B302 is changed, when it becomes the predetermined region C effect switching timing during the third change display during the continuous notice effect or the second re-change of the change display with the pseudo-continuous, FIG. As shown in 3), the production mode of the region C303 is switched from the production mode in which the female character C203 is shopping to the production mode in which the weapon (in this example, “cannon”) is picked up in preparation for the battle. .

  Next, after the effect of the region C303 is changed, when a predetermined super reach start time elapses during the third re-change of the change display of the notice target of the continuous notice effect or the change display accompanied by the pseudo-ream, FIG. ), The areas A301 to C303 are combined into one effect area, and the effect of super reach is started in the combined effect area. In the example shown in FIG. 63, since all effects in the area A301, the area B302, and the area C303 are changed, as shown in FIG. 63 (4), the female character 201 displayed in the area A301, An effect is started in which the female character 202 displayed in the region B302 and the female character 303 displayed in the region C303 all start battle with the enemy character 204. In the effect symbol display area 400 provided in the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the left and right are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, the same symbol of “7”) and the reach state is reached. Become.

  Next, in the production of super reach, as shown in FIG. 63 (5), for example, the female character 201 and the enemy character 204 battle, and as shown in FIG. An effect in which A201 is blown against the enemy character 204 and defeated in the battle is executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (7), the second female character C 203 starts a battle with the enemy character 204, and as shown in FIGS. 63 (7) and (8), the enemy character 204 is hit with a cannon fire. In addition, as shown in FIG. 63 (9), an effect of winning the battle is executed.

  Then, when the change display subject to the notice of the continuous notice effect is finished or when the last change of the pseudo-continuous is finished, the effect symbol display area 400 is displayed in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. And the big hit symbol is finally stopped and displayed in a state in which all the left, middle and right effect symbols are aligned with the same symbol (in this example, the same symbol “7”) (see step S872).

  In the example shown in FIG. 63, two female characters (female characters) out of the female character A201, female character B202, and female character C203 displayed in the region A301, the region B302, and the region C303 in which the production changes, respectively. Although the case where the character A201 and the female character C203) perform a battle is shown, the aspect of the effect of super reach is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, as shown in FIG. 63, when the effects of all three regions change, first, after performing an effect in which one of the three female characters battles and loses the battle. , The other female character performs a battle and defeats the battle, and the last remaining female character performs a battle and wins the battle. You may make it a big hit. Further, for example, instead of each woman character individually performing a battle, an effect may be executed in which all female characters or any two female characters simultaneously attack an enemy character.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, in this embodiment, even in the same region, the aspect of the change in the effect may be different. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 62, in the area A301, the female character A201 changes to the effect of performing training by hitting a waterfall in preparation for a battle, whereas all the areas A shown in FIG. In the example in which the production of ~ C changes, the production changes to the production of a mode in which the weapon ("本" in this example) is picked up in preparation for the battle in the same area A301 (for example, super PA3-4 or super PA3-13 When the variation pattern is designated, in step S8020 or step S8111, the process is performed by selecting the process data that changes to the effect of the female character A201 striking the waterfall for training and performing training. When the change pattern of the super PA 3-19 is specified, the process is executed in steps S8020 and S80. In step 111, process data that changes to an effect in which the female character A 201 prepares for a battle and picks up a weapon (in this example, “に”) is selected, and step S8022 and step S8105 are executed. When pattern 4 is selected, in step S8019, the process data that changes to the effect that the female character A201 is struck by a waterfall and trains in preparation for a battle is selected and step S8022 or step S8105 is executed. On the other hand, when the effect change pattern 10 is selected, in step S8019, the process data that changes to the effect in which the female character A201 prepares for the battle and takes the weapon (“槍” in this example) is selected. (Step S8022 and Step S8105 are executed).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 62, in the region B302, the female character B202 is struck by a waterfall in preparation for a battle and changes to an effect of training, whereas in all the regions A to C shown in FIG. In the example in which the effect changes, the effect changes to an effect in which the weapon (in this example, “sword”) is picked up in preparation for the battle in the same region B302 (for example, the variation pattern of Super PA 3-4 and Super PA 3-13 changes) If it is specified, process data that changes to the effect of the manner in which the female character B202 is struck by a waterfall in preparation for a battle and trains in step S8020 or step S8111 is selected and step S8022 or step S8105 is executed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the super PA 3-19 is designated, step S8020 or step S811 In step S8022 and step S8105, the process data changes to an effect in which the female character B202 prepares for the battle and takes the weapon (in this example, “sword”), and executes step S8022. When 4 is selected, in step S8019, in order to execute step S8022 and step S8105 by selecting process data that changes to the effect of the female character B202 hitting a waterfall in preparation for a battle and training. On the other hand, when the effect change pattern 10 is selected, in step S8019, the female character B202 selects process data that changes to an effect in which the weapon (in this example, “sword”) is prepared in the battle. (Step S8022 and Step S8105 are executed)

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, when the effects of all the areas A to C change during the pseudo-continuation, it is determined that a big hit will be made (for example, when step S94 is executed, FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, there may be a case where a super PA 3-19 in which the effects of all the areas A to C change is determined only when the game is a big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the production changes in the same area, the production in all areas A to C changes when the production changes to an aspect of picking up a weapon in preparation for a battle. Since it is a big hit, it can be said that the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit is high. Note that, even in the case of being out of place, it may be changed to an effect in which the female character prepares for the battle and picks up the weapon in the same manner as in the example shown in FIG. In this case, for example, in the case of a big hit, the manner in which the female character prepares for battle and picks up weapons is determined as a mode of change of production at a higher rate than in the case of being out of place, When the production changes to a mode in which a female character prepares for a battle and picks up a weapon, compared to a case in which the production changes to a mode in which a female character strikes a waterfall in preparation for a battle and trains The degree of expectation (reliability) may be increased. Specifically, in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, a variation pattern in which the production changes in a manner in which a female character picks up a weapon in preparation for a battle even in the case of being out of place is prepared, and step S94 is performed. When it is a big hit when executing, the variation pattern of the direction in which the production changes to a mode in which the female character takes the weapon in preparation for the battle is determined at a higher rate than in the case of the loss. What should I do? Also, for example, in FIGS. 46 to 48, an effect change pattern in which the effect changes to an aspect in which a female character strikes a waterfall and trains in preparation for a battle, and an aspect in which a female character takes a weapon in preparation for a battle When the step S6022 is executed, a large percentage of female characters are battled as compared to the case of loss. It is only necessary to determine an effect change pattern in which the effect changes to a mode in which the weapon is picked up.

  It should be noted that the change modes of the effects in each of the areas A to C are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. For example, even if the change of the effects in the same area is changed, it can be changed in a plurality of modes. You may comprise. And, for example, even when the production of the same region changes, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be different depending on the difference in the change of the production, and the degree of expectation for the probability variation big hit (Reliability) may be varied. In this case, for example, in the same manner as described above, not only a change in the effect in any of the areas A to C but also an effect change pattern and a variation pattern that specify the change mode of the effect are prepared in advance. The effect control microcomputer may determine the effect change pattern in step S6022, or the game control microcomputer 560 may determine the variation pattern in step S94, so that the effect change mode is any one of a plurality of modes. It may be determined. Then, for example, an effect change pattern determination table, a change pattern type determination table, or a change pattern determination table in which determination values are assigned at different ratios with respect to the change modes of each effect depending on whether it is a big hit or not. Thus, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be made different depending on the difference in the change of the effect. In addition, for example, an effect change pattern determination table, a change pattern type determination table, or a change pattern determination table in which determination values are assigned at different rates with respect to the change modes of each effect in the case of a probable big hit and a normal big hit. And the degree of expectation (reliability) for a probable big hit may be varied depending on the change in the production.

  For example, in the above case, when determining the mode of change of the production in the pseudo-series, not only the change of the production in any of the areas A to C but also the variation pattern that specifies the mode of change of the production is prepared in advance. In this way, the game control microcomputer 560 may determine not only which of the areas A to C is changed by determining the variation pattern, but also the mode of change of the effects. Further, for example, when determining the mode of change of the effect in the pseudo-ream, it is not determined on the game control microcomputer 560 side, but on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, the effect change pattern determination process similar to step S6022 is performed. You may make it decide by going. In this case, for example, not only a change in effect in any of the areas A to C but also an effect change pattern for designating the change mode of the effect is prepared in advance, and the effect control microcomputer 100 generates the effect change pattern. By determining, not only which region A to C effect is changed, but also the mode of change of the effect may be determined. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 use a determination table in which determination values are assigned at different ratios with respect to the mode of change of each effect depending on whether the game is a big hit or not. A variation pattern determination process according to the process similar to step S94 and a lottery process using a random number according to the process similar to step S6022, and the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is varied depending on the difference in the change of the effect. You may do it. In addition, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 have a determination table in which determination values are assigned at different ratios with respect to changes in each effect in the case of a probable big hit and in the case of a normal big hit. Is used to perform a variation pattern determination process according to the process similar to step S94 and a lottery process using random numbers according to the process similar to step S6022, and expectation that a probable big hit will be caused by the difference in the aspect of the change in the production The degree (reliability) may be varied.

  In addition, for example, when determining the aspect of the effect change during the continuous notice effect, not only the effect change in any of the areas A to C but also the effect change pattern for designating the effect change mode is prepared in advance. In this way, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the production change pattern, so that not only the production of any region A to C but also the change mode of the production may be decided. Further, for example, when determining the aspect of the effect change during the continuous notice effect, it may be determined not on the effect control microcomputer 100 side but on the game control microcomputer 560 side. In this case, for example, not only a change in effect in any of the areas A to C but also a variation pattern that specifies the change mode of the effect is prepared in advance, and the game control microcomputer 560 performs step S94. By determining a variation pattern that can also specify an effect change pattern, it is possible to determine not only which area A to C effect is changed, but also the aspect of the effect change. In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 follow the same process as step S94, using a determination table in which determination values are allocated at different ratios in the case of the big hit and the case of the big hit. A lottery process using a random number may be performed according to the variation pattern determination process or the process similar to step S6022, and the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be varied depending on the change in the effect. Further, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 use the determination table in which determination values are allocated at different ratios in the case of the probable big hit and in the case of the normal big win, as in step S94. In accordance with the variation pattern determination process according to the process and the lottery process using a random number according to the same process as step S6022, the expectation (reliability) to be a probable big hit is varied according to the difference in the change of the effect It may be.

  Next, the execution timing of a predetermined effect executed in each of the areas A to C on the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is executed will be described. FIGS. 64 to 67 are diagrams illustrating execution timings of predetermined effects executed in the areas A to C on the display screen of the effect display device when the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is executed. FIG. Among these, FIG. 64 shows the execution timing when the effect of only the region A among the regions A to C changes. FIG. 65 shows the execution timing when the effect changes in the order of the region A and the region B among the regions A to C. FIG. 66 shows the execution timing when the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region A among the regions A to C. FIG. 67 shows the execution timing when all effects in the areas A to C change.

  First, with reference to FIG. 64, a case where the effect of only the region A among the regions A to C changes will be described. In this embodiment, when starting the first variable display during the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode, as shown in FIG. 64, the display screen of the effect display device 9 has three effect areas ( The areas A to C) are divided, and in each of the areas A to C, a predetermined effect for normal time (a normal effect A, a normal effect B, and a normal effect C) is started. In addition, in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 64, as an example, it is assumed that the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed using the effect change pattern 1 that changes the effect of only the region A.

  Next, at the predetermined area A effect switching timing during the first fluctuation display during the continuous notice effect (see the effect change timing in FIG. 64), the effect of the area A changes.

  Next, after the first variable display during the continuous notice effect, the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect is started. When a predetermined super reach start time during the variable display that is subject to the notice of the continuous notice effect has elapsed (see the reach start timing in FIG. 64), as shown in FIG. 64, the areas A to C are combined into one effect. It becomes an area, and the production of the super reach is started in the combined production area.

  Next, a case where the effect changes in the order of the region A and the region B among the regions A to C will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, when starting the first variable display during the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode, as shown in FIG. 65, the display screen of the effect display device 9 has three effect areas ( The areas A to C) are divided, and in each of the areas A to C, a predetermined effect for normal time (a normal effect A, a normal effect B, and a normal effect C) is started. In addition, in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 65, as an example, it is assumed that the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed using the effect change pattern 4 that changes the effect in the order of the area A and the area B.

  Next, when the predetermined area A effect switching timing is displayed during the first variation display during the continuous notice effect (see the first effect change timing in FIG. 65), the effect of the area A changes. Next, after the first variable display during the continuous notice effect is finished, the second variable display during the continuous notice effect is started. At the predetermined area B effect switching timing during the second variation display during the continuous notice effect (see the second effect change timing in FIG. 65), the effect in area B changes.

  Next, after the second variable display during the continuous notice effect, the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect is started. When a predetermined super reach start time during the variable display that is subject to notice of the continuous notice effect has elapsed (see the reach start timing in FIG. 65), as shown in FIG. 65, the areas A to C are combined into one effect. It becomes an area, and the production of the super reach is started in the combined production area.

  In this embodiment, even if the combination of areas where the effects change is the same area A and area B, the order in which the effects change may be different. For example, in this embodiment, when the continuous notice effect is executed using the effect change pattern 5, the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region A.

  The case where an effect changes in order of the area | region B and the area | region A among area | regions A-C is demonstrated using FIG. In this embodiment, when starting the first variable display during the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode, as shown in FIG. 66, the display screen of the effect display device 9 has three effect areas ( The areas A to C) are divided, and in each of the areas A to C, a predetermined effect for normal time (a normal effect A, a normal effect B, and a normal effect C) is started. In addition, in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 66, as an example, it is assumed that the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed using the effect change pattern 5 that changes the effect in the order of the area A and the area B.

  Next, when the predetermined area B effect switching timing during the first fluctuation display during the continuous notice effect is reached (see the first effect change timing in FIG. 66), the effect of the area B changes. Next, after the first variable display during the continuous notice effect is finished, the second variable display during the continuous notice effect is started. At the predetermined area A effect switching timing during the second variation display during the continuous notice effect (see the second effect change timing in FIG. 66), the effect in area A changes.

  Next, after the second variable display during the continuous notice effect, the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect is started. When a predetermined super reach start time during the variable display that is subject to the notice of the continuous notice effect has elapsed (see the reach start timing in FIG. 66), as shown in FIG. 66, the areas A to C are combined into one effect. It becomes an area, and the production of the super reach is started in the combined production area.

  Next, a case where all effects in the areas A to C are changed will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, when starting the first variable display during the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change”, as shown in FIG. 67, the display screen of the effect display device 9 has three effect areas ( The areas A to C) are divided, and in each of the areas A to C, a predetermined effect for normal time (a normal effect A, a normal effect B, and a normal effect C) is started. In addition, in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 67, as an example, the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed using the effect change pattern 10 that changes all effects in the areas A to C.

  Next, at the predetermined area A effect switching timing during the first variable display during the continuous notice effect (see the first effect change timing in FIG. 67), the effect of the area A changes. Next, after the first variable display during the continuous notice effect is finished, the second variable display during the continuous notice effect is started. At the predetermined area B effect switching timing during the second fluctuation display during the continuous notice effect (see the second effect change timing in FIG. 67), the effect in area B changes. Next, after the second variable display during the continuous notice effect is finished, the third variable display during the continuous notice effect is started. When the predetermined area C effect switching timing during the third variation display during the continuous notice effect is reached (see the third effect change timing in FIG. 67), the effect in area C changes.

  Next, after the third variable display during the continuous notice effect, the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect is started. When a predetermined super reach start time during the variable display that is subject to the notice of the continuous notice effect has elapsed (refer to the reach start timing in FIG. 67), as shown in FIG. It becomes an area, and the production of the super reach is started in the combined production area.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, the case where the effects executed in the areas A to C are individually changed is shown. However, a plurality of areas of the areas A to C are combined. Then, the changed effect may be executed in the combined region. 68 and 69 are explanatory diagrams showing modifications of the execution timing of a predetermined effect executed in each of the areas A to C on the display screen of the effect display device. Among these, FIG. 68 shows a modified example of the execution timing when the effect changes in the order of the region A and the region B in the regions A to C. FIG. 69 shows a modification of the execution timing when all effects in the areas A to C change.

  First, with reference to FIG. 68, a modification example in which the effect changes in the order of the region A and the region B among the regions A to C will be described. In the modification shown in FIG. 68, when the first variable display during the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is started, the display screen of the effect display device 9 has three effects as shown in FIG. The area is divided into areas (areas A to C), and in each of the areas A to C, a predetermined effect for normal time (a normal effect A, a normal effect B, and a normal effect C) is started. In addition, in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 68, as an example, it is assumed that the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed using the effect change pattern 4 that changes the effect in the order of the area A and the area B.

  Next, at the predetermined area A effect switching timing during the first variable display during the continuous notice effect (see the first effect change timing in FIG. 68), the effect of the area A changes. Next, after the first variable display during the continuous notice effect is finished, the second variable display during the continuous notice effect is started. When the predetermined area B effect switching timing during the second variation display during the continuous notice effect (see the second effect change timing in FIG. 68), the area A and the area B are combined into one effect area, The changed effect is executed in the combined effect region. In this case, for example, it is only necessary to execute an effect in such a manner that the female character A and the female character B jointly train in preparation for the battle in the combined effect area.

  Next, after the second variable display during the continuous notice effect, the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect is started. When a predetermined super reach start time during the variable display that is subject to the notice of the continuous notice effect has elapsed (see the reach start timing in FIG. 68), as shown in FIG. 68, the areas A to C are combined into one effect. It becomes an area, and the production of the super reach is started in the combined production area. As shown in the example shown in FIG. 68, when the effect of only region A and region B has changed (when the effect of region C has not changed), all regions A to C are merged and super reach is achieved. Instead of executing the effect, only the region A and the region B may be combined, and the effect of super reach may be executed in the effect region where the region A and the region B are combined.

  Next, a modification in the case where all effects in the areas A to C are changed will be described with reference to FIG. In the modification shown in FIG. 69, when the first variable display during the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is started, the display screen of the effect display device 9 has three effects as shown in FIG. The area is divided into areas (areas A to C), and in each of the areas A to C, a predetermined effect for normal time (a normal effect A, a normal effect B, and a normal effect C) is started. In addition, in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 69, as an example, the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed using the effect change pattern 10 that changes all effects in the areas A to C.

  Next, at the predetermined area A effect switching timing during the first variable display during the continuous notice effect (see the first effect change timing in FIG. 69), the effect of the area A changes. Next, after the first variable display during the continuous notice effect is finished, the second variable display during the continuous notice effect is started. At the predetermined area B effect switching timing during the second variation display during the continuous notice effect (refer to the second effect change timing in FIG. 69), the area A and the area B are combined into one effect area, The changed effect is executed in the combined effect region. In this case, for example, it is only necessary to execute an effect in such a manner that the female character A and the female character B jointly train in preparation for the battle in the combined effect area. Next, after the second variable display during the continuous notice effect is finished, the third variable display during the continuous notice effect is started. At the predetermined area C effect switching timing during the third variation display during the continuous notice effect (see the third effect change timing in FIG. 69), all the areas A to C are combined into one effect area. The effect after the change is executed in the combined effect region. In this case, for example, it is only necessary to execute an effect in such a manner that the female character A, the female character B, and the female character C all prepare for the battle and train together in the effect area after the combination.

  Next, after the third variable display during the continuous notice effect, the variable display that is the target of the continuous notice effect is started. When a predetermined super reach start time during the variable display that is the subject of the advance notice of the continuous notice effect has elapsed (see the reach start timing in FIG. 69), as shown in FIG. Super reach production is started in one production area.

  Next, the execution timing of a predetermined effect executed in each of the areas A to C on the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the pseudo-ream and super reach are executed will be described. FIGS. 70 to 73 are explanatory diagrams showing execution timings of predetermined effects executed in the areas A to C on the display screen of the effect display device when the pseudo-ream and super reach are executed. Among these, FIG. 70 shows the execution timing when the effect of only the region A among the regions A to C changes. 71 shows the execution timing when the effect changes in the order of the region A and the region B among the regions A to C. FIG. 72 shows the execution timing when the effect changes in the order of the region B and the region A among the regions A to C. FIG. 73 shows the execution timing when all effects in the areas A to C change.

  First, with reference to FIG. 70, the case where the effect of only the region A among the regions A to C changes will be described. In this embodiment, when the variable display is started according to the variable pattern including the pseudo-ream and the super reach, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into three effect areas (areas A to C) as shown in FIG. Then, in each of the areas A to C, a predetermined effect for normal time (normal effect A, normal effect B, and normal effect C) is started. In addition, in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 70, as an example, it is assumed that the variable display is executed using the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-1 and the super PA 3-10 that change the effect only in the area A.

  Next, when the predetermined area A effect switching timing during the first fluctuation is reached (see the effect change timing in FIG. 70), the effect of the area A changes.

  Next, after the first temporary stop symbol is displayed temporarily, the first re-variation (final variation) is started. When a predetermined super reach start time of the final variation has elapsed (see the reach start timing in FIG. 70), as shown in FIG. The production of super reach is started.

  Next, a case where the effect changes in the order of the region A and the region B among the regions A to C will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, when the variable display is started in accordance with the variable pattern including pseudo-ream and super reach, as shown in FIG. 71, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into three effect areas (areas A to C). Then, in each of the areas A to C, a predetermined effect for normal time (normal effect A, normal effect B, and normal effect C) is started. In addition, in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 71, as an example, it is assumed that the variable display is executed using a variation pattern of super PA 3-4 or super PA 3-13 that changes the effect in the order of region A and region B.

  Next, when the predetermined area A effect switching timing during the first fluctuation is reached (see the first effect change timing in FIG. 71), the effect of area A changes. Next, after a temporary stop display of the first temporary stop symbol, the first re-variation is started. At the predetermined region B effect switching timing during the first re-variation (see the second effect change timing in FIG. 71), the effect of the region B changes.

  Next, after the second temporary stop symbol is displayed temporarily, the second re-variation (final variation) is started. When a predetermined super reach start time of final variation has elapsed (see the reach start timing in FIG. 71), as shown in FIG. 71, regions A to C are combined into one effect region, and the combined effect region is The production of super reach is started.

  In this embodiment, even if the combination of areas where the effects change is the same area A and area B, the order in which the effects change may be different. For example, in this embodiment, when the variation display is executed using the variation pattern of super PA 3-5 or super PA 3-14, the effect changes in the order of region B and region A.

  The case where an effect changes in order of the area | region B and the area | region A among area | regions A-C is demonstrated using FIG. In this embodiment, when the variable display is started in accordance with the variable pattern including pseudo-ream and super reach, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into three effect areas (areas A to C) as shown in FIG. Then, in each of the areas A to C, a predetermined effect for normal time (normal effect A, normal effect B, and normal effect C) is started. In addition, in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 72, as an example, it is assumed that the variable display is executed using a variation pattern of super PA 3-5 or super PA 3-14 that changes the effect in the order of region A and region B.

  Next, when the predetermined region B effect switching timing during the first fluctuation is reached (see the first effect change timing in FIG. 72), the effect of the region B changes. Next, after a temporary stop display of the first temporary stop symbol, the first re-variation is started. At the predetermined area A effect switching timing during the first re-variation (see the second effect change timing in FIG. 72), the effect of area A changes.

  Next, after the second temporary stop symbol is displayed temporarily, the second re-variation (final variation) is started. When a predetermined super reach start time of the final fluctuation has elapsed (see the reach start timing in FIG. 72), as shown in FIG. The production of super reach is started.

  Next, a case where all effects in the areas A to C are changed will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, when the variable display is started according to the variable pattern including the pseudo-ream and the super reach, as shown in FIG. 73, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is divided into three effect areas (areas A to C). Then, in each of the areas A to C, a predetermined effect for normal time (normal effect A, normal effect B, and normal effect C) is started. In addition, in the effect symbol display area provided at the lower right end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the effect symbol variation display is reduced and displayed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 73, as an example, the change display is executed using the change pattern of the super PA 3-19 that changes all effects in the areas A to C.

  Next, when the predetermined area A effect switching timing during the first fluctuation is reached (see the first effect change timing in FIG. 73), the effect of the area A changes. Next, after a temporary stop display of the first temporary stop symbol, the first re-variation is started. At the predetermined region B effect switching timing during the first re-variation (see the second effect change timing in FIG. 73), the effect of the region B changes. Next, after a temporary stop display of the second temporary stop symbol, a second re-variation is started. At the predetermined area C effect switching timing during the second re-variation (see the third effect change timing in FIG. 73), the effect of the area C changes.

  Next, after the temporary stop symbol of the third time is displayed as a temporary stop, the third re-variation (final variation) is started. When a predetermined super reach start time of final variation has elapsed (see the reach start timing in FIG. 73), as shown in FIG. 73, regions A to C are combined into one effect region, and the combined effect region The production of super reach is started.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 73, the case where the effects executed in the areas A to C are individually changed is shown, but the display is changed according to the change pattern including the pseudo-ream and super reach. In the same manner as in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, a plurality of areas A to C may be merged and an effect after the change may be performed in the merged area. Good.

  Next, the general execution timing of the continuous notice effect will be described. FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing the general execution timing of the continuous notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 74, a case where a new start winning is generated during the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 74, as an example, a case where a continuous notice effect of “change in effect” is executed is shown. It is the same.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see Steps S311 and S313), the winning effect processing (see Steps S217A and S217B) is performed. Execute and determine when winning. If a new start winning is detected in the first start winning opening 13, it is not in the high base state (probability change state or short time state) and is not in the big hit gaming state (see steps S215A and S216A). Then, the winning time effect process is executed to determine the winning time. Then, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted based on the determination result of winning determination (see steps S218A and S218B).

  The production control microcomputer 100 adds 1 to the reserved memory number (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) based on the reception of the reserved memory number addition designation command (steps S651, S652, S654, S655). reference). In the example shown in FIG. 74, it is assumed that the pending storage number before receiving the winning determination result designation command and the pending memory number addition designation command is 3, and the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the pending memory count addition designation command. Based on the reception, the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area (the first reserved memory number storage area or the second reserved memory number storage area) is incremented by 1 to 4. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a continuous notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800E), and a continuous notice effect mode determination process (see step S6019). It is assumed that “effect change” is determined as the effect mode, and the effect change pattern 10 is determined by the effect change pattern determination process (see step S6022). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the current number of reserved memories (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 74) in the variation counter (see step S6024). Thereafter, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the fluctuation number counter is decremented by 1 to 3 (see step S876).

  Next, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command, a reserved memory number increase designation command (a first reserved memory number increase designation command or a second pending memory number increase designation command) are received, and the next fluctuation display is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the effect in the area A based on the fact that the effect change pattern 10 is determined and the first variable display during the continuous notice effect. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (see step S872). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (see step S876).

  Furthermore, when the next variation display is started, the production control microcomputer 100 continues the continuous announcement production based on the value of the variation counter being 2, and as shown in FIG. Is changed, and the effect in the region B is changed based on the second variable display during the continuous notice effect. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (see step S872). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (see step S876).

  Further, when the next variation display is started, the production control microcomputer 100 continues the continuous announcement production based on the value of the variation number counter being 1, and as shown in FIG. Is changed and the effect in the area C is changed based on the fact that the display is the third variable display during the continuous notice effect. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (see step S872). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (see step S876). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the set continuous notice execution flag based on the fact that the value of the fluctuation counter is 0 (see steps S8017 and S879), and performs the continuous notice effect. finish.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, for example, in the case of executing a continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change”, the change display immediately before the winning display is determined. In the case of the variation display, it shows the case where the production is performed such that the production of any area in the continuous notice production is changed during the fluctuation display. You may make it perform the production that the production of the area changes. In this embodiment, in the variable display that is the target of determination at the time of winning, an effect that changes the effect in any area during the continuous notice effect is not executed, so one variable display Both the production change and the super reach production are executed to prevent the production from becoming too unnatural (especially to prevent the production from becoming too busy just before the end of the variable display. ing). In addition, when the change of the effect is executed even during the variation display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning, the change of the effect is executed before the super reach effect during the variation display is executed. It is only necessary that the production of super reach be executed after the completion of.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state), the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely low, and the gaming state is the probability change state or the short time state (high base state). ), The frequency with which the variable winning ball apparatus is opened is increased. For this reason, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is rare for the game ball to start winning a prize at the second start winning opening 14, and the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed continuously. In addition, when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state, the frequency at which the game ball starts and wins at the second start winning opening 14 is increased, and the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Mainly, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed continuously. However, even if the game state is the normal state, the game ball may start and win at the second start winning port 14 at a low frequency, and the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed. In this case, if there is a start prize for the second start prize opening 14 during the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning for the start prize to the first start prize opening 13, the middle of the continuous notice effect is given. Then, the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the change display of the second special symbol interrupts during the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is controlled to be interrupted.

  Hereinafter, the production timing when the continuous notice production is interrupted will be described. FIG. 75 and FIG. 76 are explanatory diagrams showing the effect timing when the continuous notice effect is interrupted. Among these, FIG. 75 shows the continuous notice effect that is executed based on the determination of “superreach loss” or “superreach big hit” in the determination at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. The production timing in the case of interruption is shown. In addition, FIG. 76 shows the performance timing when the continuous notice effect that is executed based on the determination of “non-reach” is determined in the determination at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. Show.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, as an example, a case where a continuous notice effect of “effect change” is executed is shown. The production timing is the same. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, it is assumed that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 during the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as non-reach or non-reach as a variable display result.

  First, referring to FIG. 75, the continuous advance notice is executed based on the determination of “super reach out” or “super reach big hit” in the determination at the time of winning with respect to the start winning at the first starting winning opening 13. The production timing when the production is interrupted will be described.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning in the first start winning opening 13 (see step S311), it performs a winning effect process (see step S217A) and makes a winning determination. When it is determined that “super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot” is reached, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted (see step S218A). In this case, the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines “effect change” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice effect mode determination process (see step S6019), and effects in the effect change pattern determination process (see step S6022). It is assumed that the change pattern 10 has been determined.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a first reserved storage number increase designation command are received, and the next fluctuation display is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the effect in the area A based on the fact that the effect change pattern 10 is determined and the first variable display during the continuous notice effect. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 75 (see step S872).

  Further, when starting the next variable display, the production control microcomputer 100 continues the continuous notice effect, and as shown in FIG. The effect in the region B is changed based on the second change display. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 75 (see step S872).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 75, it is assumed that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs during the execution of the continuous notice effect. In such a case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag for interrupting continuous notice as shown in FIG. 75 when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even during execution of the continuous notice effect. Control is performed to interrupt the continuous notice effect (see steps S8003 and S8004). When the production control microcomputer 100 performs the change display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol during the interruption of the continuous notice effect, the other announcement effect is displayed during the change display. Is controlled not to be executed (see Y in step S8011). However, in the case where the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is interrupted, the continuous notice effect itself is not interrupted, and the effect is not changed while being divided into a plurality of areas A to C. In each area, it is desirable to continue the effect display in the current effect state.

  Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished and the state returns to the state where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the continuous notice interruption flag is reset (see step S8006), as shown in FIG. , Resume the remaining continuous notice effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75, when the change display of the effect symbol is started in synchronization with the next variable display of the first special symbol, the fact that the effect change pattern 10 is determined, and the continuous notice The continuous notice effect is resumed by changing the effect in the area C based on the second variable display during the effect. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 75 (see step S872).

  Next, referring to FIG. 76, when the continuous notice effect that is executed based on the fact that the winning determination at the first starting winning opening 13 is determined to be “non-reach” is interrupted. The production timing will be described.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning in the first start winning opening 13 (see step S311), it performs a winning effect process (see step S217A) and makes a winning determination. If it is determined that “non-reach” is detected, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted (see step S218A). In this case, the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines “effect change” as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice effect mode determination process (see step S6019), and effects in the effect change pattern determination process (see step S6022). It is assumed that the change pattern 10 has been determined.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a first reserved storage number increase designation command are received, and the next fluctuation display is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the effect in the area A based on the fact that the effect change pattern 10 is determined and the first variable display during the continuous notice effect. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (see step S872).

  Further, when starting the next variable display, the production control microcomputer 100 continues the continuous announcement effect, and as shown in FIG. The effect in the region B is changed based on the second change display. Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the non-reach off symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (see step S872).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 76, it is assumed that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs during the execution of the continuous notice effect. In such a case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. Therefore, when the second special symbol change display is executed even during execution of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the continuous notice interruption flag as shown in FIG. Control is performed to interrupt the continuous notice effect (see steps S8003 and S8004). When the production control microcomputer 100 performs the change display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol during the interruption of the continuous notice effect, the other announcement effect is displayed during the change display. Is controlled not to be executed (see Y in step S8011).

  Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished and the state returns to the state where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the continuous notice interruption flag is reset (see step S8006), and the first discontinuous notice is given. The execution flag is reset (see steps S8007 and S8008), and control is performed so as to end the continuous notice effect. In other words, if the determination result that is the reason for executing the continuous notice effect is “non-reach”, as shown in FIG. 76, after the continuous notice effect is interrupted, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Even if it ends, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect is ended as it is without restarting the continuous notice effect.

  If the continuous notice effect of the second special symbol is terminated after the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is interrupted, and then the continuous notice effect is terminated as is, At the start stage, the divided display of the display screen in the effect display device 9 may be terminated to return to the normal display state (a state where the display is not divided into the areas A to C), or the interrupted second special symbol change When the display is ended and the next variable display of the first special symbol is started, the divided display of the display screen in the effect display device 9 may be ended to return to the normal display state.

  Next, the continuous notice lottery prohibition period will be described. FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the continuous notice lottery prohibition period. When the special symbol variation display is started, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved storage number increase designation command, and starts the variation display. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the continuous notice prohibition flag and the continuous notice prohibition period measurement timer (see step S616A), and until a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) elapses as shown in FIG. The execution of the process of determining the continuous notice effect is prohibited.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is received after 4 ms from the reception of the variation pattern command, and the pending storage number subtraction designation command is received after the elapse of 4 ms, but the variation pattern command is received. If a start prize is received within 8 ms from when the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received, and when the reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the continuous notice effect is executed based on the number of the reserved memory number that is increased by one. The number of times may be determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 77, when the start-up prize is received before receiving the reserved memory number subtraction designation command after the variable display is started in a state where there are two reserved memories, the presentation control CPU 101 holds the hold Based on the reception of the storage number addition designation command, it is recognized that there are three pending storage numbers. If the continuous notice effect is determined in this state, a situation in which it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executed over three variable displays is generated because the number of reserved memories is internally recognized as three. . However, after that, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received and the reserved memory number returns to the state of two, so that the continuous notice effect for three times is actually executed even though only two fluctuation displays are actually executed. As a result, there is a difference between the number of reserved memories and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, even if a variation pattern command is received, the determination of the continuous notice effect is prohibited until a predetermined period (for example, 32 ms) elapses. Is prevented from occurring.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the effect display device 9 can be divided into a plurality of areas A to C in which predetermined effect contents can be displayed. When executing the continuous notice effect of the “change” effect mode, or when executing the change display according to the change pattern designating the pseudo-ream and super reach, different effects are executed in the plurality of areas A to C, respectively. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 can change an effect executed in at least one of the plurality of areas A to C, and the effect is changed in the plurality of areas A to C. Different super reach effects (for example, effects such that different female characters battle with enemy characters depending on the area where the effects have changed) are executed in accordance with the effect changes in the area. Then, when the production changes in two or more of the plurality of areas A to C, the production control microcomputer 100 has one supermarket corresponding to the combination of the change modes of the areas where the production has been changed. Reach effects (for example, effects such that a plurality of female characters battle with enemy characters) are executed. Therefore, since different super reach effects are executed depending on which of the plurality of areas A to C the effect has changed, when the super reach effect is performed, the effect is changed. The production mode can be diversified. Further, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a change in performance may occur in any region, and to improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, when the continuous notice effect is executed or when the pseudo-ream is executed, the effect using the plurality of areas A to C is executed, so the effect in any of the areas A to C may change. The expectation that there is no more can be continued further, and the interest in games can be improved.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, when executing the variable display for a plurality of times before the variable display targeted for the continuous notice effect, the effect to be executed in the plurality of areas A to C is continuously changed. The notice effect is executed, and the effect executed in any one of the plurality of areas A to C is changed for each variable display. Therefore, since the effect changes by one area for each variation display, the effect contents of the continuous notice effect can be easily understood by the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, when executing the pseudo-continuous, the effect to be executed in the plurality of regions A to C is changed, and any one of the regions A to C is changed for each re-variation. The production to be executed is changed. Therefore, the production changes by one area for each re-variation, so that the contents of the pseudo-continuous production can be easily understood by the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the case where the display screen of the effect display device 9 is configured to be divided into three effect regions (regions A to C) has been shown, but the display screen is not limited to three, and for example, the effect display device 9 The display screen may be divided into four or more effect areas.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines which of the plurality of areas A to C is to be changed when the pseudo-ream and super reach effects are executed ( That is, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern of any one of the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-19, thereby changing the production in any of the plurality of regions A to C. However, the present invention is not limited to the processing method shown in this embodiment, and may be determined by the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the determination of the presence or absence of the reach and the determination of whether the reach type is the normal reach or the super reach (not the determination of the area to be changed). A variation pattern command is transmitted by simply determining a variation pattern that can specify only the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a lottery process using random numbers based on the reception of the variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern with super reach, and any one of the plurality of regions A to C is selected. Whether to change the effect of the area may be determined independently.

  Further, for example, the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach, either normal reach or super reach, may be determined by the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 first determines the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach through a lottery process using random numbers, and further performs a lottery process using random numbers to obtain a plurality of areas A to C. It is possible to determine independently which region of the production is to be changed, and conversely, a lottery using random numbers to determine which region of the plurality of regions A to C is to be changed first. After determination by processing, a lottery process using random numbers may be further performed to determine the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach.

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 side determines which of the plurality of areas A to C is to be changed when the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is executed. (That is, when the production control microcomputer 100 decides one of the production change patterns 1 to 10, it decides which of the plurality of areas A to C the production of the area is changed. However, it is not limited to the processing method shown in this embodiment, and it may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560 side. In this case, for example, a variation pattern capable of specifying an effect change pattern is prepared in advance, and the game control microcomputer 560 may determine the change mode of the effect by determining the change pattern. Good.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since the effect of the super reach is performed based on the effect of the change in any of the areas A to C during the change display of the effect symbol, the effect is generated in any of the areas A to C. It is possible to execute the change in the meaning of a notice effect for super reach. Therefore, it is possible to associate the notice effect, which is a change in the effect in the areas A to C, with the effect of the super reach, thereby improving the effect of the effect using the multiple areas A to C. In addition, since the change in the production in the areas A to C is positioned and controlled so as to be the production in the previous stage of the super reach, it is possible to prevent the useless production from being performed after the super reach. .

  In this embodiment, when the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is executed and the effects of the areas A to C are changed, the change display of the notice target is “super reach jackpot”, “super It is executed based on either “reach out of reach” or “non-reach out”. Therefore, when the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change” is executed and the effects of the areas A to C are changed, the change display of the notice object is not necessarily super reach, and the super reach is performed at a low rate. There is a case that does not become (so-called Gase continuous notice effect may be executed). It should be noted that the continuous notice effect of the “effect change” effect mode is executed to change the effects of the areas A to C only when the noticed change display is “super reach big hit” or “super reach off”. Alternatively, if the production of any of the areas A to C changes, super reach may be executed without fail.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the production of each area A to C is changed in the pseudo-continuous according to the variation pattern of super PA3-1 to super PA3-19, the case where the production of super reach is always executed is shown. However, even if the production of each of the areas A to C is changed in the pseudo-continuous, the super reach may not be achieved at a low rate. In this case, for example, regarding a normal reach or non-reach variation pattern, a variation pattern accompanied by a change in production is prepared in advance in each of the regions A to C, and the pseudo-ream is changed. Even if the performance of one of the areas is changed, the change display may end without changing to the super reach, the normal reach, or reaching without reaching the final change in the pseudo-series. You may do it.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where it applies when performing the effect of a super reach based on the effect of the change of any area | region AC during the display of the change of the effect design having been shown was shown, The effects shown in the form can also be applied to uses other than the super reach. For example, during the jackpot game, an effect in such a manner that the effects of any of the areas A to C change is executed, and the probability change during the jackpot game is based on the change of the effects of any of the areas A to C. It is also possible to apply to uses such as executing a promotion effect.

  Moreover, when applying to the use which performs a probability change promotion effect, you may comprise so that the rate of probability change promotion may differ, for example depending on whether the effect of which area | region of area | region AC changed. In this case, for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, when the effect in the area C is changed, the rate of the probable promotion is higher than when the effect in the area A is changed (for example, the effect in the same area B). Even if the change of region A and region B changes, the rate of probability change promotion increases when the change of region B and region C changes). It is also possible to execute the probability variation promotion effect by determining whether or not the probability variation promotion is performed using the determination table to which is assigned. Further, for example, the rate of positive change promotion may be increased as the number of regions where the production changes is increased.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the effects performed in the plurality of areas A to C are changed in different orders depending on whether the game is a big hit or not. Therefore, even if the production changes in the same area combination, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit can be varied depending on the order of the change, such as from which area the production has changed. Can be improved.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, when changing the effect to be executed in any one of the plurality of areas A to C, the change is executed in that area in any one of a plurality of types of change aspects. Change the production. And the reach | attainment effect which changes according to the change mode when the effect to perform in the area | region is changed is performed. Therefore, even if the effect in the same area changes, the reach effect varies depending on the change mode, so that the reach effect can be diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the production of the production mode having a predetermined story characteristic in the plurality of areas A to C, and executes the production in the plurality of areas A to C, respectively. Production is performed according to a common time axis. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the production of the super-reach in the form having the continuity and the production aspect of the production executed in the plurality of areas A to C (for example, the woman displayed in the areas A to C). Super-reach production is performed in such a manner that the character battles with the enemy character). Therefore, the production effect can be improved by executing the production executed in the plurality of areas A to C and the production of super reach as a series of productions, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 executes the production of the super reach, the display screen of the production display device 9 is divided into a plurality of areas A to C, and the plurality of areas are displayed. It changes to the state which is not divided | segmented into area | region AC. That is, in this embodiment, the areas A to C are combined into one effect area, and the effect of super reach is executed in the combined effect area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult to understand which stage the player should pay attention to after the start of the super reach effect, and to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating. .

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the first special symbol variable display to indicate the ratio of the effect to be executed in any of the plurality of regions A to C. The effect to be executed in at least one of the plurality of areas A to C is changed in accordance with the case where the display is performed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, FIGS. 47A and 47B, and FIGS. 48C and 48D, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Is executed, the ratio of development to super reach is high after the effect of area A changes, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, super reach after the effect of area C changes is performed. The rate of development is high. For this reason, the proportion of which region of the plurality of regions A to C changes varies depending on which variation display of the plurality of special symbols is executed, so that the interest in the game is improved. be able to.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the production executed in the plurality of areas A to C at different timings. For example, in this embodiment, when executing the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “effect change”, the effect of each region A to C is changed in different variable displays, and the change pattern includes pseudo-ream and super reach. When the variation display according to the above is executed, the effects of the areas A to C are changed in different re-variations. Therefore, by changing the performance at different timings between the plurality of areas, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player overlooks that the change in the performance has occurred. It can prevent that it falls.

  For example, in consideration of common sense, it is difficult for a player to always watch all three areas A to C at the same time, so that the effects change at exactly the same timing in a plurality of areas A to C. If the performance changes in two or all three regions at the same time, the player may not be able to recognize all the changes in the performance and may overlook. Therefore, in this embodiment, by shifting the timing at which the effect changes between the areas A to C, it is difficult for the player to overlook that the effect has changed in any of the areas. Yes.

  In this embodiment, the timing of the change in the production for each region has been described as being the same every time (for example, if the production of the same region A is changed, the same after starting the variation every time. Even if the effect of the region A is changed at the timing when the time has passed), the timing of changing the effect may be varied every time. In this case, for example, even when changing the effect of the same region, the timing of changing the effect is determined randomly by performing a lottery process using random numbers, and the effect of the region is determined at the determined timing. It may be changed. In this case, the timing for changing the effects in the areas A to C may be determined in a single lottery process, or the lottery process is executed for each area to change the effects. May be determined individually.

  Also, when the timing for changing the production is varied even during the same fluctuation as described above, for example, depending on whether or not it is a big hit, the timing for changing the production may be varied. Good. For example, in the case of a big hit, the production changes at a later timing or the production changes at an earlier timing, even if it is in the same fluctuation, as compared to the case of a loss. It may be configured.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when the pseudo control is executed, the microcomputer 100 for effect control performs an effect in a larger area when it is a big hit than when it is a loss. To change. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, in the case of a big hit, the effect may change in two areas of the areas A to C as compared to the case of being out of place. The determination values of the variation pattern determination table are assigned so as to increase. In particular, when the effect changes in all of the areas A to C, the big hit is fixed. Therefore, as the area where the production changes increases, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 receives a prize based on the number of executions of the variable display stored in the RAM (no power backup) when the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state. In the variable display performed by the right (holding storage) that is the determination target of the time determination, the remaining number of the variable display executed until the time-short state is ended is equal to or less than the upper limit number (for example, “8”) of the holding storage. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice using the continuous notice allocation table D that restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice when it is determined that the display is a variable display that is executed based on the right that has been won in the period (holding storage) To decide. Therefore, when there are few remaining times in the short-time state, prevent the situation where the judgment result at the time of winning is inconsistent with the decision result at the start of actual fluctuation and prevent the situation where the pre-reading notice cannot be performed properly. Can do.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the winning determination based on the number of executions of the variable display stored in the RAM (without power backup) after the time reduction state is ended. The right to start winning in the period until the number of executions of the variable display executed after the short-time state ends becomes the upper limit number of the reserved storage (for example, “8”). If it is determined that the variable display is executed based on (holding storage), it is determined whether or not to perform the prefetching notice using the continuous notice allocation table E that restricts the execution of the prefetching notice. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the prefetching notice is impaired when it is immediately after the end of the time-saving state, and to prevent a situation in which the prefetching notice cannot be appropriately performed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state, the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to resume power supply after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching notice using the continuous notice allocation table D in which the execution of the prefetching notice is restricted until the time saving state is completed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the determination result at the time of winning a prize is not consistent with the determination result at the start of actual fluctuation at the time of power failure recovery, and a situation in which the prefetching advance notice cannot be performed appropriately can be prevented.

  Therefore, according to this embodiment, even when the remaining number of time reduction states is small, immediately after the completion of the time reduction state, or when a power failure is restored, the player's expectation is not impaired. A pre-reading notice can be made.

  Further, in this embodiment, the winning determination is not performed in the big hit gaming state or the high base state (see steps S215A and S216A), so that the big hit gaming state or the high base state is not performed. In some cases, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is not performed so that the possibility of a big hit cannot be recognized, but this is a case of being in a big hit gaming state or a high base state. Alternatively, the determination at the time of winning may be performed, and the determination result specifying command at the time of winning may be transmitted. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state or the high base state is in effect. If the big hit gaming state or the high base state, the winning determination result designation is made. Even when a command is received, it may be controlled not to perform a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect).

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol, the notice effect is executed. Ban. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a continuous effect (continuous notice effect) and another notice effect are executed in a mixed manner and confuse the player.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the start winning at the first start winning opening 13, the second winning based on the start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 is performed. Compared to the case where the special symbol variation display is executed, it is decided to make a small hit at a high rate. Therefore, by suppressing the occurrence frequency of the small hit game based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, it can be understood that it was a small hit game despite expecting a sudden big odd hit game in the high base state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a situation in which the player is discouraged more than necessary, and to prevent a situation in which the player is unnecessarily disadvantageous.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the variation pattern type determination table for detachment to change the variation pattern type of the effect symbol to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with super reach, It is determined as one of a plurality of variation pattern types including a variation pattern type that does not include a variation pattern with super reach. Then, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. In this case, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C indicate that the variation pattern types including the variation pattern with super reach (super CA2-7 to super CA2-10) regardless of the total number of pending storages. Common determination values (230 to 251) are assigned. Also, the variation pattern types for loss 135A to 135C used when the gaming state is the normal state are common to the non-reach variation pattern types (non-reach CA2-1) regardless of the total number of pending storages. Determination values (1 to 79) are assigned. Therefore, in the case of executing a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) based on the determination that the super reach is reached, it is possible to prevent inconsistency depending on the number of reserved memories. In addition, the distribution of the variation pattern with super reach and other variation patterns can be easily changed at the design stage.

  For example, in this embodiment, it is premised that the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, and the variation display is performed according to the determined variation pattern, but is read into the holding buffer at the timing when the start winning is detected. If the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) includes a random value corresponding to the super reach with high reliability for the big hit, the variation display for the super reach is performed before the variation display is executed. A continuous notice effect is executed. In this case, if the deviation variation pattern type determination table is designed as in this embodiment, when a continuous notice effect is executed, a change with a super reach corresponding to the noticed change pattern type is always performed. Since the display is executed, a notice effect corresponding to the variation pattern type can be executed in advance.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-278663, it is described that a variation pattern type is first determined and then one of the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type is determined. There are variation patterns that are included between a plurality of variation pattern types. For this reason, even when the continuous notice effect is executed in advance, other effects such as normal reach may be executed, which may cause distrust to the player. If you try not to give distrust to the player, you can only perform a notice effect that the reach will occur at best (you can not give a more reliable notice such as super reach) ), The effect of the notice effect will be significantly reduced. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute a continuous notice effect with higher reliability, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the notice effect without giving distrust to the player.

  In addition, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-278663 includes a variation pattern that exists in common among the variation pattern types. For this reason, it is complicated to perform a distribution between a specific variation pattern such as a super reach variation pattern and other variation patterns at the design stage. That is, even if it is desired to change only the selection ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern without changing the selection ratio of each fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation pattern type, the selection ratios within a plurality of fluctuation pattern types Therefore, the appearance rate of the variation pattern differs between the variation pattern types. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a specific variation pattern such as a variation pattern of super reach and other variation patterns are configured not to exist in common among a plurality of variation pattern types. The appearance rate of the variation pattern can be easily changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for detachment has different determination values depending on the total number of pending storages for variation pattern types including variation patterns (normal reach and non-reach) other than super reach. Assigned. For example, in this embodiment, only the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening (for shortening) 135C (see FIG. 11C) selected when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is used. A variation pattern type (non-reach CA2-3) including (non-reach PA1-2) is selected. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories (in this example, the total number of reserved memories) is large, the operating rate can be improved by shortening the fluctuation time by averaging. In other words, if a lot of fluctuation display with a long fluctuation time such as super reach is executed when the reserved memory is accumulated, the reserved memory is not easily digested, and there is a possibility that a start winning that is invalidated may occur. When the number of reserved memories is large, the operating time is improved by averaging the fluctuation time and shortening. On the other hand, when there is a small amount of reserved memory, if the fluctuation time is short, the reserved memory is quickly consumed and the variable display is interrupted. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the number of reserved storages is small, the variation time is averaged to be long and the variation display is not easily interrupted by not performing the shortening variation. Therefore, in this embodiment, inconsistency does not occur depending on the number of reserved storages while making it difficult for the variable display to be interrupted.

  Further, according to this embodiment, after the display of the effect symbols is started and the display result is derived and displayed, the effect symbols that have been temporarily stopped are temporarily stopped, and then the effect symbols are variablely displayed again. A plurality of types of pseudo-continuous variation patterns (super PA3-1 to superPA3-19) for executing re-variation once or a plurality of times are included. Then, a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) of the effect mode of “effect change” is executed in the same effect mode as when the pseudo-ream and super reach effects are executed. For this reason, even when an effect of the same effect mode is executed, it is possible to expect the possibility of both a case where a pseudo-ream effect is executed and a case where a pre-reading notice is executed. Can improve interest in

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern type is determined according to a common process when displaying. The game control microcomputer 560 is common when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a and when the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 8b. According to the process, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of special symbol displays, the capacity of a storage area for storing a program and data for determining a variation pattern can be reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether it is a big hit or not, a normal big hit that is a round 15 big hit or a probability big hit that is a big hit and a sudden probable big hit that is a round two big hit. Is determined before the derivation display of the display result. Then, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the big hits of 15 rounds and big rounds of 2 rounds are different. And decide which of the transitions. Therefore, the game value of the game state to be transferred can be varied depending on which special symbol variable display is executed, and the progress of the game can be diversified.

  Further, according to this embodiment, at the time of the start winning prize before the start of the change, the game control microcomputer 560 determines in advance whether or not the change pattern of the effect pattern becomes a change pattern with super reach. . Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that it becomes super reach before the variable display of the production symbol determined to be super reach is started based on the determination at the time of winning when super reach is reached. An effect to be notified can be executed. For this reason, it is possible to notify that it will be super reach before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern by determining the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination table for detachment. In this case, in the deviation variation pattern type determination table, a common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. . Further, in the variation pattern type determination table for loss, different determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types including variation patterns other than super reach (normal reach and non-reach) according to the total number of pending storage. Therefore, by assigning the ratio of the determination value to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variable display time as the total number of pending storage increases, the operating rate of the variable display decreases. It can be prevented as much as possible.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table. In this embodiment, when the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 11C is used, and the total number of reserved storage is 0 to 2 (3 or less). In this case, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B are used (see steps S86 to S90). As shown in FIG. 78, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the ratio is less (normal reach, super reach) than when the total number of pending storages is 0-2. When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, as shown in FIG. 11C, the non-reach CA2-3 variation pattern type is selected and the non-reach PA1-2 is a variation pattern of shortened variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the operation rate of the variable display is reduced as much as possible by shortening the average fluctuation time as the total number of pending storage increases.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, regardless of the total number of pending storages, a common determination value (230˜) is used for the variation pattern type with super reach (super reach A, super reach B). 251). Therefore, at the time of starting winning, it is possible to easily determine in advance whether or not it will be super reach if only the value of the extracted random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) is confirmed. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the distribution of the determination value of the variation pattern type determination table for deviation is made different for the two types of the total pending storage number being 0 to 2 or 3 or more, The method of differentiating the determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the distribution may be made more finely stepwise according to the total number of pending storage. In this case, for example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0, 1 and the offset for the total pending storage count 2, the total pending storage count 3 and the total pending storage count 4 A variation pattern type determination table may be prepared in advance, and the distribution of the variation pattern type with reach and the variation pattern type of the shortened variation may be further varied in stages. In addition to such an example, various combinations of the deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared in advance are conceivable. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4... May be used.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a totally common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to a variation pattern type with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storage. The determination value for super reach in the deviation variation pattern type determination table may include the determination value for super reach in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 79, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the determination values 230 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach, whereas the total pending storage numbers 0 to In the case of 2, determination values 200 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach. However, even in such a case, if the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it becomes easy to become super reach beforehand. Can be determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the super reach is reached before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, among the determination values 0 to 199 assigned to the non-reach variation pattern type when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the range of the determination values 100 to 199 Are not included in the range 0 to 99 of the determination value assigned to the non-reachable variation pattern type when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. On the other hand, the range 230 to 251 of the determination value assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach when the total pending storage number is 3 or more indicates the super value when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2. All of the determination value ranges 200 to 251 assigned to the variation pattern types with reach are included. Therefore, when the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning a prize, it can be easily determined in advance that it will be super reach.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 79, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more. The determination values 200 to 229 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and the ranges to which the determination values are assigned to the variation patterns with normal reach are not overlapped. The range of determination values assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach may be overlapped between the case and three or more cases. For example, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation pattern type with normal reach is assigned. On the other hand, the determination values 180 to 229 may be assigned. Even in the case of such a configuration, some of the determination values 180 to 229 among the determination values 180 to 229 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Only the range of 199 is included in the range of determination values 100 to 199 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the combined pending storage number is 0 to 2.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined to be a big hit, it is a fluctuation pattern with a super reach at a higher rate than when it is determined not to be a big hit. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, when it is determined to be out of place, the determination value is assigned only to a narrow range of 230 to 251 for super reach, whereas FIGS. As shown in (2), when it is determined to be a big hit, a determination value is assigned to a super reach over a wide range of 150 to 251 or 80 to 251. Therefore, the expectation to the big hit gaming state when variable display with super reach is performed can be enhanced, and the interest in gaming can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is determined that the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach is a variation pattern with normal reach or a non-reach variation pattern. Therefore, even when variable display with super reach is not performed, variable display with normal reach can be executed, giving a sense of expectation that it may be a big hit gaming state. Further improvement can be achieved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation pattern type to include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach or a variation pattern type not including a variation pattern with super reach. Decide on. Then, when it is determined that the variable display pattern type of the effect symbol is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach, it is determined that the variation pattern of the effect symbol is a variation pattern with super reach. Therefore, the distribution between the variation pattern with super reach and the variation pattern other than that can be easily changed at the design stage only by changing the distribution of the variation pattern type.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In addition, in embodiment shown above, the characteristic structure of the gaming machine as shown to the following (1)-(3) is also shown.

(1) The effect execution means executes an effect of an effect mode having a predetermined story characteristic in a plurality of display areas, and executes an effect executed in each of the plurality of display areas according to a common time axis (for example, effect control) As shown in FIGS. 62 (1) and 63 (1), the microcomputer 100 for an effect produces an effect in which the female character A201 executed in the area A301 is flying in the sky by executing steps S8022 and S8105. Or the effect that the female character B202 executed in the area B302 is walking on the ground, the effect that the female character C203 that is executed in the area C303 is shopping), and the reach effect executing means. Provides a reach effect of an aspect that has continuity with an effect aspect that is executed in a plurality of display areas. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S8022 in accordance with the process data of the process table selected in step S8016, or executes step S8105 based on the process data switched in step S8114. As shown in FIGS. 62 (3) to (6) and FIGS. 63 (4) to (9), the female characters A201 to C203 displayed in any one of the areas A301 to C303 are also used for the production of super reach. May be configured to appear). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the production effect by executing the production and reach production executed in the plurality of display areas as a series of productions, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) The effect execution means changes the effect to be executed in the plurality of display areas at different timings (for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the continuous notice effect of the effect change “effects”). When changing the effects of the areas A to C in different variable displays and executing the variable display according to the variable pattern including pseudo-ream and super reach, the effects of the areas A to C are changed in different re-changes. It may be configured to change). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player overlooks the occurrence of the change in the production by changing the production at different timings among the plurality of display areas. It is possible to prevent the interest in games from deteriorating.

(3) The gaming machine includes pre-determining means (for example, a part for executing step S61 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) that determines whether or not to enter the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed. When the means is determined to be in the specific gaming state by the predetermining means, the means changes the effect to be executed in many display areas as compared to the case where it is determined not to be in the specific gaming state by the predetermining means ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the variation pattern is such that in the case of a big hit, there are more cases where the production changes in two regions A to C than in the case of a loss. The determination value of the determination table is assigned, and in particular, when the production changes in all of the areas A to C, the big hit is fixed. Regardless of the case, when the region number determination process is executed to determine the number of regions where the effect changes, the effect control microcomputer 100 increases the degree of expectation for the big hit as the number of regions where the effect changes increases. (The number of regions in which the production changes is determined so that (reliability) becomes high). According to such a configuration, as the display area where the effect changes increases, a sense of expectation for entering the specific gaming state can be increased, and an interest in the game can be improved.

  The present invention is applicable to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, a plurality of discriminating each based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display after a game medium passes through the start area. A variable display unit that starts variable display of types of identification information and derives and displays a display result, and a specific game state when the display result derived and displayed in the variable display unit becomes a predetermined specific display result The present invention is preferably applied to the gaming machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (6)

A variable display unit that starts variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and derives and displays a display result, and the display result derived and displayed in the variable display unit is a predetermined specific display result. In a gaming machine that becomes a specific gaming state when
After variable display of identification information is started and before the display result is derived and displayed, temporary stop display results that are non-specific display results are temporarily displayed, and then variable display is performed again for all identification information. Re-variable display execution means for executing display once or a plurality of times;
Effect execution means for executing different effects in a plurality of display areas capable of displaying predetermined effect contents;
Reach effect execution means for executing a reach effect as an effect as to whether or not the specific display result is obtained,
The effect execution means can change the effect to be executed in at least one of the plurality of display areas along with the re-variable display,
The reach production execution means includes:
A different reach effect is executed according to the change mode of the effect in the display region where the effect is changed among the plurality of display regions,
When a presentation changes in two or more display areas among the plurality of display areas, one reach presentation according to a combination of change modes of each display area in which the presentation has changed is executed. . The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect execution means changes the effect executed in any one of the plurality of display areas for each re-variable display. Pre-decision means for deciding whether or not to make a specific gaming state before derivation display of the display result,
The effect execution means includes a plurality of display areas in different orders depending on whether the advance determination means determines that the specific gaming state is set or if the advance determination means determines that the specific gaming state is not set. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein an effect to be executed is changed. The effect executing means, when changing the effect to be executed in any one display area among the plurality of display areas, changes the effect to be executed in the display area in any one of a plurality of types of change modes. ,
The reach effect executing means executes a reach effect that differs depending on a change mode when the effect executed by the effect executing means is changed in the display area. Gaming machine. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein when the reach effect is executed by the reach effect executing unit, the effect executing unit changes the plurality of display areas to one display area. The variable display section
A first variable display unit that starts variable display of a plurality of types of first identification information that can identify each of them, and that displays and displays a display result;
A second variable display unit that starts variable display of a plurality of types of second identification information that can identify each of them and derives and displays a display result;
The effect execution means is configured to execute a variable display of the first identification information in the first variable display unit, and to determine a ratio of the display region to be changed in which display region is to be executed. And changing the effect to be executed in at least one of the plurality of display areas, different from the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the second variable display section. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.